2007 pontiac g5 owner manual m - vaden gmpp · 2006. 7. 6. · vehicle damage warnings also, in...

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................ 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Rear Seats ............................................. 15Safety Belts ............................................ 16Child Restraints ...................................... 39Airbag System ........................................ 64Restraint System Check ......................... 80

Features and Controls ................................. 83Keys ....................................................... 85Doors and Locks .................................... 94Windows ............................................... 100Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 102Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 106Mirrors .................................................. 125OnStar® System ................................... 127Storage Areas ...................................... 131Sunroof ................................................ 132

Instrument Panel ........................................ 133Instrument Panel Overview ................... 136Climate Controls ................................... 152Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .... 157Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 174Audio System(s) ................................... 185

Driving Your Vehicle .................................. 217Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 218Towing ................................................. 254

Service and Appearance Care ................... 265Service ................................................. 268Fuel ...................................................... 270Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 276Headlamp Aiming ................................. 309Bulb Replacement ................................ 312Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 319

2007 Pontiac G5 Owner Manual M

1

Tires ..................................................... 320Appearance Care .................................. 353Vehicle Identification ............................. 361Electrical System .................................. 362Capacities and Specifications ................ 369

Maintenance Schedule ............................... 371Maintenance Schedule .......................... 372

Customer Assistance Information ............. 393Customer Assistance and Information ..... 394Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 409

Index ........................................................... 413

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem are registeredtrademarks, and the name G5 is a trademarkof General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Pontiac Division whenever it appears inthis manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15864460 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................... 9Manual Lumbar ............................................. 9Heated Seats .............................................. 10Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 10Head Restraints .......................................... 13Easy Entry Seat (Coupe) ............................ 14

Rear Seats .................................................... 15Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 15

Safety Belts .................................................. 16Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 16Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 21How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 22Driver Position ............................................. 22Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 30Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 31Right Front Passenger Position ................... 31Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 32Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 35Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 38Safety Belt Extender ................................... 38

Child Restraints ............................................ 39Older Children ............................................. 39Infants and Young Children ......................... 42

Child Restraint Systems .............................. 45Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 49Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 51Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 57Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 60Airbag System .............................................. 64

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 67When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 69What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 71How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 71What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 72Passenger Sensing System ......................... 73Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........ 78Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 79Restraint System Check ............................... 80

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 80Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 81

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle ifyou try to adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat withyour body to be sure the seat is locked in place.

8

Driver Seat Height Adjuster

The driver’s seat height adjuster is located on theoutboard side of the seat.

To raise the seat, move the lever upwardrepeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.To lower the seat, move the lever downwardrepeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the knob islocated on the front ofthe driver seat lowercushion on theinboard side.

Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the lumbar support.

9

Heated SeatsYour vehicle may have heated front seats. Theswitches are located on the instrument panelabove the climate control system.

Press the side of theswitch with the doubleindicator lights to turn onthe heated seat at thehighest setting.

Both indicator lights will be lit to indicate that thesetting is on high. Press the side of the switch withthe single indicator light to go to the low setting.The indicator light will be lit to indicate thatthe setting is on low. Return the switch to thecenter to turn off the heated seat.If your vehicle has been turned off, the last heatedseat setting will be retained when the vehicle isstarted again.

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle ifyou try to adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull onthe seatback to be sure it is locked.

Driver’s Switch Shown,Passenger’s Switch

Similar

10

Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks.The lever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sureit is locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

11

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

12

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it. To lowerthe head restraint,press the button,located on the top of theseatback, and pushthe restraint down.

13

Easy Entry Seat (Coupe)

{CAUTION:

If the easy entry right front seat is notlocked, it can move. In a sudden stop orcrash, the person sitting there could beinjured. After you have used it, be sure topush rearward on an easy entry seat to besure it is locked.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

The front passenger seat can be used to easilyget in and out of the rear seat.

To use the easy entry seat, do the following:

1. Push down the easy entry seat handle locatedon the rear of the seatback on the outboardside to release the seatback.

2. Tilt the seatback forward completely whilepushing the seat forward.

3. Move the seatback to its original position aftersomeone gets into the rear seat area. Makesure the seatback is locked.

4. Move the seat rearward until it locks into place.

14

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatYou can fold either side of the rear seatback downfor more cargo space.

To lower the rear seatback, follow these steps:

1. Open the trunk and pull one or both of the smallhandles located in the center of the trunk.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Once the handle is pulled, the seatback canbe pushed open through the trunk, or pulleddown from the inside of the vehicle.

15

To raise the rear seatback, lift it up and pushrearward until you hear a click. Push and pull onthe seatback to be sure it is locked into place.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always pull forward on thetop of the seatback at the area of the latchto be sure it is locked.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

16

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and yourpassengers to buckle your safety belts. See SafetyBelt Reminder Light on page 160 and PassengerSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 160.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will bea bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes canbe so serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

17

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

18

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

19

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

20

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speedsof less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

21

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 39 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 42. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is howto wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

22

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure itis secure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 38.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster tothe height that is right for you. Impropershoulder belt height adjustment could reducethe effectiveness of the safety belt in acrash. See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustmenton page 30. 6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the

shoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

23

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

24

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

25


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

26


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

27


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

28


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have the fullwidth of the belt to spread impact forces. Ifa belt is twisted, make it straight so it canwork properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

29

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, pressthe release button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You canmove the heightadjuster up just bypushing up onthe shoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pressingthe release button to make sure it has lockedinto position.

30

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 22.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature which may turn offthe passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, justlet the belt go back all the way and start again.

31

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

32

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 38.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

33

The lap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slideunder the lap belt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force at your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

34

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats and for some adults.When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from the neck and head.There is one guide for each outboard passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between theedge of the seatback and the interior bodyto remove the guide from its storage clip.

35

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt and insertthe two edges of the belt into the slots ofthe guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

36

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 32. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Pull the guide upward toexpose its storage clip, and then slide theguide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inwardand slide them in between the seatback andthe interior body, leaving only the loop ofthe elastic cord exposed.

37

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontaland near frontal crash if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met. And, ifyour vehicle has side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten the safety beltsin a side crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activatein a crash, you will need to get new ones,and probably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 81.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, yourdealer will order you an extender. When you goin to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enough for you.To help avoid personal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for the seat it ismade to fit. The extender has been designedfor adults. Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.For more information see the instruction sheetthat comes with the extender.

38

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt shouldfit snugly below the hips, just touching the topof the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severeor even fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

39

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the centerof the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 35. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safetybelt buckle. In either case, be sure thatthe shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,so that in a crash the child’s upper bodywould have the restraint that belts provide.

40

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

41

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, theyneed to use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will becomeso heavy it is not possible to hold it.For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

42

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when it inflates canbe seriously injured or killed. Airbagsplus lap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, but notfor young children and infants.

CAUTION: (Continued)


Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed forthem. Young children and infants needthe protection that a child restraintsystem can provide.

43

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kindsof restraints available for children withspecial needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so thecrash forces can be distributed acrossthe strongest part of an infant’s body,the back and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

44

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed.A young child’s hip bones are still sosmall that the vehicle’s regular safety beltmay not remain low on the hip bones, asit should. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

45

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

46

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat canalso help a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,or position children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system isa portable one, which is purchased bythe vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries,an add-on child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. With built-in or add-onchild restraints, the child has to be securedwithin the child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

47

Securing an Add-on Child Restraintin the Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Makesure the child restraint is properlyinstalled in the vehicle using the vehicle’ssafety belt or LATCH system, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions inthis manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 51 for more information. A childcan be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

48

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, following theinstructions that came with that restraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

49

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one can



guarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraintcan move around in a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint in yourvehicle — even when no child is in it.

50

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

51

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

52

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

Each rear seating position has two exposed metallower anchors in the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located onthe trim cover.

The top tether anchors are located under the trimcovers on the rear seatback filler panel. Pullopen the trim cover to access the anchor.

Be sure to use an anchor located on the sameside of the vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restrainton page 49 for additional information.

Rear Seat

53

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

54

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint hasbeen installed. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint tothe lower anchors.

55

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor trim

cover to expose the anchor.2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestraint and youare using a singletether, route the tetherover the headrestraint.

56

If the position you areusing has a fixed oradjustable head restraintand you are using adual tether, routethe tether around thehead restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 51.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

57

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

58

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 51.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let itgo back all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

59

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 49.

In addition, your vehicle may have the passengersensing system. The passenger sensing systemis designed to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facinginfant seat or a small child in a forward-facingchild restraint or booster seat is detected.See Passenger Sensing System on page 73 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 162for more information on this including importantsafety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turnedoff. We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.


60


If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seatas far back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in a rear seat.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securing theforward-facing child restraint. See Manual Seatson page 8.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 51.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child restraint inthis position if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 51 if your childrestraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 73. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See Manual Seatson page 8.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to RUN or START.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 162.

61

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

62

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


8. If your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem and the airbag is off, the off indicatoron the instrument panel will be lit and staylit when the key is turned to RUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

63

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver anda frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted sideimpact airbags. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsare available for the driver and the passengerseated directly behind the driver and for the rightfront passenger and the passenger seateddirectly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG will appear onthe airbag covering on the garnish trim near theceiling and the side windows.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.


64


Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deployin moderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Roof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover or in rearcrashes. Everyone in your vehicle shouldwear a safety belt properly — whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

65

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbagsplus lap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 39 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 42.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 161 for more information.

66

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

67

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the driver and the person seated directlybehind the driver, it is located in the ceilingabove the side windows.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger and the persondirectly behind that passenger, it is located inthe ceiling above the side windows.

68

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupantand an airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag,and do not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. And, if your vehiclehas roof-mounted side impact airbags,never secure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie downthrough any door or window opening.If you do, the path of an inflating sideimpact airbag will be blocked. The path ofan inflating airbag must be kept clear.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact and how quickly your vehicleslows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has an electronicfrontal sensor which helps the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impactand a more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level lessthan full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

69

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into awall that does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel for the reduced deployment is about12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and the thresholdlevel for a full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph(29 to 38.5 km/h). The threshold level canvary, however, with specific vehicle design, so thatit can be somewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole)the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an anglethe airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mountedside impact airbags. See Airbag System onpage 64. Roof-mounted side impact airbags areintended to inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. A roof-mounted side impact airbag willinflate if the crash severity is above the system’sdesigned threshold level. The threshold levelcan vary with specific vehicle design.Roof-mounted side impact airbags are notintended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers or rear impacts. A roof-mounted sideimpact airbag is intended to deploy on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For roof-mounted side impact airbags,inflation is determined by the location and severityof the impact.

70

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules inside thesteering wheel and in the instrument panel in frontof the right front passenger. For vehicles withroof-mounted side impact airbags, there are alsoairbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contactthe steering wheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.The airbag supplements the protection provided bysafety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.

But the frontal airbags would not help you inmany types of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,primarily because an occupant’s motion is nottoward those airbags.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, andthen only in moderate to severe frontal ornear-frontal collisions for the driver’s and rightfront passenger’s frontal airbags, and onlyin moderate to severe side collisions for sideimpact airbags.

71

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,so quickly that some people may not even realizethe airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impactairbags may still be at least partially inflatedminutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Somecomponents of the airbag module — the steeringwheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger’s airbag, or thegarnish trim and ceiling of your vehicle nearthe side windows for vehicles with roof–mountedside impact airbags — may be hot for a short time.The parts of the airbag that come into contactwith you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There may be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andturn the hazard warning flashers when the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors again, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for those features.

72

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occurfrom the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system. If you do notget them, the airbag system will not be thereto help protect you in another crash. A newsystem will include airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collectionand Event Data Recorders on page 403.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can meanthat your airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemIf your vehicle has one of the indicators pictured inthe following illustrations, then your vehicle hasa passenger sensing system for the right frontpassenger’s position. A passenger airbag statusindicator on the instrument panel will be visiblewhen you turn your ignition key to START or RUN.

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol forON and OFF, will be visible on the instrumentpanel during the system check. When the systemcheck is complete, either the word ON or theword OFF, or the symbol for ON or the symbolfor OFF will be visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 162.

United States Canada

73

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat and safety belt. The sensors are designedto detect the presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the passenger’s frontalairbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. We recommend that child restraintsbe secured in a rear seat, including an infantriding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding ina forward-facing child seat and an older childriding in a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


74


If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seatas far back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.• The system determines that an infant is

present in a rear-facing infant seat.• The system determines that a small child is

present in a forward-facing child restraint.• The system determines that a small child is

present in a booster seat.• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off

of the seat for a period of time.• The right front passenger seat is occupied by

a smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicatoron the instrument panel will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 60.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

75

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the rightfront passenger’s seat, but the off indicator islit, it could be because that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens, turn thevehicle off and ask the person to place theseatback in the fully upright position, then situpright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,with the person’s legs comfortably extended.

Restart the vehicle and have the person remainin this position for about two minutes. Thiswill allow the system to detect that person andthen enable the passenger’s airbag.

76

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 161for more on this, including importantsafety information.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not using seatcovers or other aftermarket equipment if yourvehicle has the passenger sensing system. SeeAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 79 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

77

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchasea service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 410.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

78

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors.If you have any questions about this,you should contact Customer Assistancebefore you modify your vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 394.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceilingand pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbagmodules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 394.

79

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job,have it repaired. See Care of Safety Beltson page 356 for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced.The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the roof-mounted side impact airbagcovering (if equipped) on the garnish trim andceiling near the side windows, the airbagmay not work properly. You may have toreplace the airbag module in the steeringwheel, both the airbag module and theinstrument panel for the right front passenger’sairbag, or the side impact airbag module,garnish trim and the ceiling covering forroof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped).Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

80

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new beltsor LATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 161.

81

✍ NOTES

82

Keys .............................................................. 85Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 86Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ................................................. 87

Doors and Locks .......................................... 94Door Locks ................................................. 94Power Door Locks ....................................... 95Delayed Locking .......................................... 95Automatic Door Lock ................................... 96Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ........ 96Rear Door Security Locks (Sedan) .............. 96Lockout Protection ....................................... 97Trunk .......................................................... 98

Windows ...................................................... 100Manual Windows ....................................... 100Power Windows ........................................ 101Sun Visors ................................................ 102

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 102Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 102PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 104PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 104

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 106New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 106Ignition Positions ....................................... 107Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 110Starting the Engine .................................... 110Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 112Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 113Manual Transaxle Operation ...................... 116Parking Brake ........................................... 118Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 119Shifting Out of Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 121Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 122Engine Exhaust ......................................... 123Running the Engine While Parked ............. 124

Mirrors ......................................................... 125Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 125Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 125Outside Remote Control Mirror .................. 125Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 126Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 126

Section 2 Features and Controls

83

OnStar® System .......................................... 127Storage Areas ............................................. 131

Glove Box ................................................. 131Cupholder(s) .............................................. 131

Center Console Storage Area .................... 131Driver’s Storage Compartment ................... 131Convenience Net ....................................... 131

Sunroof ....................................................... 132

Section 2 Features and Controls

84

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

85

One key is used for theignition, the doors andall other locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealerremoves the key tag from the key and gives it to thefirst owner. Each tag has a code on it that tells yourdealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extrakeys. Keep the tag in a safe place. If you lose yourkey, you will be able to have a new one made easilyusing the tag.If you need a new key, contact your dealer who canobtain the correct key code. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 399 for moreinformation.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle toget in. Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

86

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any RKE system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 87.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe vehicle’s doors may be locked and unlocked,and the trunk can be opened from about 3 feet(1 m) up to 197 feet (60 m) away with the remotekeyless entry transmitter. If your vehicle hasthe remote vehicle start feature, you can also startthe vehicle’s engine with the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the RKE system.

Remote Keyless Entrywith Remote Start

Remote Keyless Entrywithout Remote Start

87

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, the engine may be started fromoutside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See“Remote Vehicle Start” later in this section formore detailed information.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. The interior lamps will turn off after all of thedoors are closed. If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the remote lock feedbackcan be programmed to have the horn chirpand/or the turn signals flash when the RKEtransmitter is used to lock the vehicle’s doors. See“LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DICVehicle Personalization on page 179 for moreinformation.

Pressing the lock button may also arm the contenttheft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 102.

K (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock thedriver’s door. If the button is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.The interior lamps will turn on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.If enabled through the DIC, the remote unlockfeedback can be programmed to have thehorn chirp and/or the turn signals flash when theRKE transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle’sdoors. See “UNLOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH”under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 179for more information.

If enabled through the DIC, and it is dark enoughoutside, the vehicle’s high-beam headlamps,parking lamps, and back-up lamps will turn oneach time the unlock button on the transmitter ispressed. These exterior lamps will stay on for20 seconds, or until a door is opened. See “EXT(Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 179 for additionalinformation.

Pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitterwill disarm the content theft-deterrent system.See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 102.

88

V (Remote Trunk Release): The trunk willopen when this button on the transmitter ispressed and held for about one second. You canopen the trunk with the transmitter when thevehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h), whenthe ignition is off, or when the vehicle shift lever isin PARK (P), if your vehicle has an automatictransaxle.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): This buttonmay be used to locate your vehicle. Press andrelease this button to initiate vehicle locate. Thehorn will sound three times and the headlamps andturn signals will flash three times. Press and holdthe button for about three seconds to initiate thepanic alarm. The horn will sound and theheadlamps and turn signals will flash for30 seconds. Press the button again to cancel thepanic alarm.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your dealer. Remember tobring any additional transmitters so they can alsobe re-coded to match the new transmitter.Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.Each vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.

89

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

The KEY FOB BATT LOW message in thevehicle’s DIC will display if the RKE transmitterbattery is low.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter dothe following:1. Insert a flat object, with a thin edge, into the

notch located below the vehicle locator/panicalarm button, and separate the bottom halffrom the top half of the transmitter.

2. Remove the battery and replace it with the newone. Make sure the positive (+) side of thebattery faces up. Use one three-volt, CR2032,or equivalent, type battery.

3. Snap the front and back together tightly somoisture will not get inside the transmitter.

4. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

90

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote start feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle. It may also start thevehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems. Whenyou start your vehicle using the remote startfeature, the climate control system will come onand adjust the interior to the temperature settingsthat you left it set to when you turned thevehicle off.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws mayrequire a person using remote start to havethe vehicle in view when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

The remote start feature provides two separatestarts per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutesof engine running time.

The remote start feature needs to be reset afteryour vehicle’s engine is started two times using thetransmitter’s remote start button. The remotestart system is reset by inserting the vehicle’s keyinto the ignition switch and turning to RUN.See Ignition Positions on page 107 for informationregarding the ignition positions on your vehicle.

You can start your vehicle’s engine from about197 feet (60 m) away. However, the range may beless while the vehicle is running, and as a resultyou may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn itoff than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 86 foradditional information.

91

/ (Remote Start): If your vehicle has the remotestart feature, the RKE transmitter will have abutton with this symbol on it.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button until thevehicle’s turn signal lamps flash.

3. When the vehicle starts, the parking lampswill turn on and remain on while the engineis running.The engine will shut off automatically after10 minutes, unless a time extension has beendone or the vehicle’s key is inserted intothe ignition switch and turned to RUN.If you enter the vehicle after a remote start,and the engine is still running, insert thekey into the ignition switch and turn to RUN todrive the vehicle.

4. To manually shut off a remote start, do any ofthe following. The parking lamps will turn offto indicate the engine is off.

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle andpress and release the remote start button.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch to RUN andthen LOCK.

Your vehicle’s engine can be started two times,per ignition cycle, using the transmitter’s remotestart feature. If only one remote start procedurehas been done, since last driving the vehicle,or resetting the remote start system, the enginemay be started again remotely by followingthe remote start procedure a second time.

If the remote start procedure is used again beforethe first 10 minute time frame has ended, thefirst 10 minutes will immediately expire andthe second 10 minute time frame will start.

92

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate ifany of the follow occur:

• The remote start system is disabled throughthe DIC.

• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.

• The vehicle’s hood is open.

• The hazard warning flashers are on.

• The check engine light is on. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 168.

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• Two remote vehicle starts have already beenprovided for that ignition cycle.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start featureare shipped from the factory with the remotestart system enabled. The system may be enabledor disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTESTART” under DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 179 for additional information.

Remote Start Ready(Automatic Transaxle Only)If your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote startready feature. This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer’s remote vehicle startfeature.

If the RKE transmitter has a plus (+) symbol onthe back cover, your vehicle has the remote startready feature. You can lock or unlock yourvehicle from about 197 feet (60 m) away.

See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to yourvehicle.

93

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. Achild can be overcome by extreme



heat and can suffer permanent injuries oreven death from heat stroke. Always lockyour vehicle whenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

To lock the driver’s door from the outside, turn thekey clockwise. To unlock the door, turn the keycounterclockwise.

You can also use the remote keyless entrytransmitter, if equipped, to lock and unlockthe doors.

From the inside, use the manual lock knobs oneach door or the power door lock switch tolock and unlock all doors.

94

Power Door Locks

Your vehicle may havepower door locks. Thelocks are locatedon the driver’s and frontpassenger’s doorarmrest.

Press the side of the switch with the lock symbolto lock the doors. This is the right side for thedriver’s switch and the left side for the frontpassenger’s switch.

Press the side of the switch with the unlocksymbol to unlock the doors. This is the left side forthe driver’s switch and the right side for thefront passenger’s switch.

Delayed LockingIf your vehicle has power locks, it will have thedelayed locking feature.

This feature will delay the actual locking of thedoors for up to five seconds when the power doorlock switch or remote keyless entry transmitteris used to lock the vehicle.

If any door is open when locking the vehicle, threechimes will sound signaling that the delayedlocking feature is active. Five seconds after thelast door is closed, all of the doors will lock and theturn signal lamps will flash. To cancel the delayand lock the doors immediately, press thelock button a second time.

This feature will not lock the doors if the key is inthe ignition.

You can disable this function through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 179.

Driver’s Switch shown,Front Passenger’s

Switch similar

95

Automatic Door LockIf your vehicle has power door locks, the doors willautomatically lock when the shift lever is moved outof PARK (P) for a vehicle with an automatictransaxle. For a vehicle with a manual transaxle,the speed must be greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The automatic door locking feature cannot bedisabled.

Programmable Automatic DoorUnlockIf your vehicle has power locks, it has aprogrammable automatic door unlock feature.

The doors can be programmed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC) to automatically unlockseveral ways. See DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 179 for more information.

Rear Door Security Locks (Sedan)Your vehicle has rear door security locks.These prevent passengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of each reardoor. You must open therear doors to accessthem. The label showinglock and unlockpositions is located nearthe lock.

Security Lock Labelshown

96

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keylessentry transmitter, if the vehicle has one, thepower door lock switch, or by lifting therear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lockout ProtectionIf your vehicle has power door locks, it will havethis feature. If you press the power door lockswitch when the key is in the ignition and any dooris open, all the doors will lock and the driver’sdoor will unlock. Be sure to remove the key fromthe ignition when locking your vehicle.

The lockout protection can be overridden bypressing and holding the power door lock in thelock position for three seconds.

97

TrunkTo release the trunk lid from the outside, use thekey or the remote keyless entry transmitter, ifequipped.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with thetrunk lid open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open or if



electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all theway.

See Engine Exhaust on page 123.

98

Remote Trunk Release

To open the trunk frominside the vehicle, pressthe remote trunk releasebutton located inside thedriver’s storagecompartment located onthe lower left side of theinstrument panel.

See Instrument Panel Overview on page 136 orDriver’s Storage Compartment on page 131.

The remote trunk release works when the ignitionis either off or in ACC, or the vehicle speed isless than 2 mph (3 km/h).

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as it coulddamage the handle. The emergency trunkrelease handle is only intended to aid a persontrapped in a latched trunk, enabling them toopen the trunk from the inside.There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located on the inside of the trunk lidof your vehicle. This handle will glow followingexposure to light. Pull the release handle and pushthe trunk lid open from the inside to open the trunk.

99

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

Manual WindowsIf your vehicle has manual windows, use thewindow crank to open and close each window.

100

Power Windows

If your vehicle haspower windows, theswitches on the driver’sdoor armrest controleach of the windows.

In addition, each passenger’s door has a windowswitch that controls that door’s window. Pressthe front of the switch to open the window. Pull thefront of the switch up to close it.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window switch has an express-downfeature which allows the window to be lowered fullywithout continuously pressing the switch. Thisswitch is labeled AUTO. Press the front of theswitch to the first position, and the driver’s windowwill open a small amount. Press the switchdown fully and release. The window goes allthe way down.

To stop the window while it is lowering, pull thefront of the switch up.

Window Lockout (Sedan)

o (Window Lockout): The driver’s windowcontrols also include a lockout switch. Press theright side of the switch to prevent the rearpassengers from using their window switches. Thedriver can still control all the windows with thelockout on. Press the switch to the left to return tonormal window operation. A red bar on theright side of the switch indicates that the lockoutfeature is off.

Sedan Shown, CoupeSimilar

101

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down the visor(s). Thevisors can also be detached from the center mountand swung to the side to cover the windows.

Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle may have a driver’s side vanitymirror. Swing down the sun visor and lift the coverto expose the mirror.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-Deterrent

Your vehicle may havea content theft-deterrentalarm system.

Arming the SystemWith the ignition off, you can arm the system bypressing the remote keyless entry transmitter lockbutton.

The system will arm after either of these thingsoccur:

• Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.

• Sixty seconds with any door open.

If you press the lock button on the transmitter asecond time while all the doors are closed,the system will arm immediately. The system willstill arm in 60 seconds if a door is open. Whenthe open door is closed, it will also become armed.

102

The security light, located on the instrument panelcluster, will turn on to indicate that arming has beeninitiated. Once the system is armed, the securitylight will flash once every three seconds.

If the security light is flashing twice per second,this means that a door is open.

If you do not want to arm the system, you may lockthe car with the manual lock knobs on the doors.

Disarming the SystemYou can disarm the system by doing any one ofthe following:• Press the remote keyless entry transmitter

unlock button.• Turn the ignition on.

If the system is armed and the trunk is openedusing the trunk release button on the transmitter,the system will temporarily disarm itself and re-armwhen the trunk has been closed. This allows you toexit the vehicle, lock the doors using the transmitter,and open the trunk using the transmitter withouthaving to disarm and re-arm the system.

Once the system is disarmed, the security light willstop flashing.

How the System Alarm is ActivatedIf the system is armed, it can be activatedby either:

• Opening the driver’s door or trunk. This willcause a ten second pre-alarm chirp followedby a thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.

• Opening any other door. This will immediatelycause a full alarm of horn and lights forthirty seconds.

When an alarm event has finished, the system willre-arm itself automatically.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmTo turn off the system alarm, do one of thefollowing:

• Press the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter. The system will thenre-arm itself.

• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter. This will also disarm thesystem.

• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.This will also disarm the system.

103

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf you hear three chirps when you press theunlock, lock, or trunk release buttons on theremote keyless transmitter, it means thatthe content theft security system alarm waspreviously activated.

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoder inyour vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system. This means you do nothave to do anything special to arm or disarm thesystem. It works when you insert or removethe key from the ignition.

104

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it preventsthe vehicle from starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the high number ofelectrical key codes.When trying to start the vehicle if the engine doesnot start and the security light comes on, the keymay have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignitionoff and try again.If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignition key.At this time, you may also want to check the fuse,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 363. If theengine still does not start with the other key, yourvehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, thefirst key may be faulty. See your dealer who canservice the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new keymade. In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 399, for more information.

It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoderto “learn” the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.

If all the currently programmed keys are lost or donot operate, you must see your dealer or alocksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to havekeys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cutexactly as the ignition key that operates the system.

To program the new key do the following:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stampedon it.

2. Insert the already programmed key in theignition and start the engine. If the enginewill not start, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toLOCK, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it tothe RUN position within five seconds of theoriginal key being turned to the LOCK position.

5. The security light will turn off once the key hasbeen programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

105

If you are ever driving and the security light comeson and stays on, you may be able to restart yourengine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+system, however, is not working properly and mustbe serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is notprotected by the PASS-Key® III+ system atthis time.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops with new linings canmean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle) onpage 256 or Towing a Trailer (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 257 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle andmore information.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

106

Ignition PositionsWith the key in the ignition switch, you can turn itto four different positions.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left andright while you turn the key hard. If none of thisworks, then your vehicle needs service.

9 (LOCK): This position locks your steeringcolumn. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will onlybe able to remove your key when the ignition isturned to LOCK.

If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shiftlever is in PARK (P).

If you have a manual transaxle, the ignition switchcan be turned to LOCK in any shift lever position.

{CAUTION:

If you have a manual transaxle removingthe key from the ignition switch will lockthe steering column and result in a loss ofability to steer the vehicle. This couldcause a collision. If you need to turn theengine off while the vehicle is moving,turn the key to ACC.

ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operatessome of your electrical accessories. It unlocks thesteering wheel and ignition.

107

R (RUN): This is the position the switch returnsto after you start your engine and release theswitch. The switch stays in the RUN position whenthe engine is running. But even when the ignitionis not running, you can use RUN to operateyour electrical accessories and to display somewarning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACC or RUN position with the engineoff. You may not be able to start your vehicle ifthe battery is allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine.When the engine starts, release the key.The ignition switch will return to RUN fornormal driving.

A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’sdoor while in LOCK or ACC, when the key hasnot been removed from the ignition.

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

108

Column Lock ReleaseFor vehicles with an automatic transaxle, Thefollowing procedure allows the ignition to be turnedto LOCK and for ignition key removal in case ofa dead battery or low voltage battery.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in PARK (P).

2. Using a tool, pry off the cover from the bottomof the steering column.

3. Place your finger into the access hole andlocate the plunger.

4. Press and hold the plunger toward the driver’sdoor while turning the ignition key to LOCK.Remove the key.

Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer assoon as possible.

109

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory Power(RAP) feature which allow’s the radio, powerwindows, and sunroof to continue to work up to10 minutes after the ignition is turned off.

Your vehicle’s radio will work when the ignitionkey is in RUN or ACC. Once the key is turned fromRUN to LOCK, the radio will continue to workfor 10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened.Also, the power windows and sunroof willcontinue to work for up to 10 minutes or until anydoor is opened.

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

Automatic TransaxleMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position -- this is a safety feature. Torestart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shiftinto PARK (P) only when your vehicle isstopped.

Manual TransaxleThe shift lever should be in the neutral positionand the parking brake engaged. Hold theclutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Yourvehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not allthe way down. That is a safety feature.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transaxle gentlyto allow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

110

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system also preventscranking if the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stopped by turning theignition switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. Ifthe vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transaxle gentlyuntil the oil warms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, your engine might notperform properly. Any resulting damage wouldnot be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

111

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may be equipped with an enginecoolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, theengine coolant heater can help. You will get easierstarting and better fuel economy during enginewarm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. For the 2.2L and 2.4L engines, theelectrical cord is located on the passenger’sside of the vehicle between the strut andthe air cleaner/filter.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. You couldbe seriously injured. Plug the cord into aproperly grounded three-prong 110-volt ACoutlet. If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extension cordrated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you do not, itcould be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact a GM dealer in the areawhere you will be parking your vehicle. The dealercan give you the best advice for that particular area.

112

Automatic Transaxle OperationIf your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, theshift lever is located on the console between theseats.

There are severaldifferent positions forthe automatic transaxle.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. Itis the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle ifthe shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brake andmove the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)on page 119. If you are pulling a trailer, seeTowing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle) onpage 256 or Towing a Trailer (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 257.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system.

113

You have to fully apply your regular brakes firstand then press the shift lever button beforeyou can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition keyis in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shiftlever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then press the shift lever buttonand then move the shift lever into another gear.See Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)on page 121.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 248.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while your engineis running at high speed is dangerous.Unless your foot is firmly on the brakepedal, your vehicle could move veryrapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift into a drivegear while your engine is running at highspeed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

114

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving withthe automatic transaxle. It provides the best fueleconomy for your vehicle. If you need more powerfor passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator all the way down.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 232.

INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used fornormal driving. However, it reduces vehicle speedwithout using your brakes for slight downgradeswhere the vehicle would otherwise accelerate dueto steepness of grade. If constant upshifting ordownshifting occurs while driving up steep hills, thisposition can be used to prevent repetitive types ofshifts. You might choose INTERMEDIATE (I)instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, windingroads and when towing a trailer, so that there is lessshifting between gears.

LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speedmore than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actuallyusing your brakes. You can use it on very steephills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift leveris put in LOW (L), the transaxle will not shift intoLOW (L) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle. Ifyou are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

115

Manual Transaxle Operation

This is your shiftpattern.

Here is how to operate your manual transaxle:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are goingless than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on theclutch pedal. Press the clutch pedal back down.Then shift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let upon the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift intoTHIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the sameway you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, andshift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutchpedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on theclutch pedal slowly while pressing the acceleratorpedal.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parkingbrake, for parking your vehicle.

116

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift,you could lose control of your vehicle.You could injure yourself or others. Donot shift down more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

Up-Shift Light

If you have a manualtransaxle, you may havean up-shift light. Thislight will show you whento shift to the nexthigher gear for the bestfuel economy.

When this light comes on, you can shift to the nexthigher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditionslet you. For the best fuel economy, accelerateslowly and shift when the light comes on.

While you accelerate, it is normal for the light togo on and off if you quickly change the position ofthe accelerator. Ignore the light when youdownshift.

United States Only

117

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located between thefront seats.

For vehicles equipped with an armrest, lift theconsole armrest in order to access the parkingbrake lever.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown and pull up on the parking brake lever. If theignition is on, the brake system warning light willcome on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 165.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold the release button inas you move the brake lever all the way down.

If you forget to release your parking brake, a chimewill sound and the PARKING BRAKE messagewill appear along with the brake system warninglight when the parking brake is applied andthe vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 177.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

118

Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer (ManualTransaxle) on page 256 or Towing a Trailer(Automatic Transaxle) on page 257.

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set theparking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingthe button on the shift lever and pushing thelever all the way toward the front of thevehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

119

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift leveraway from PARK (P) without first pushing thebutton. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too much force on theparking pawl in the transaxle. You may findit difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock,set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)properly before you leave the driver’s seat. Tofind out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 119.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, then you will be able to pullthe shift lever out of PARK (P).

120

Shifting Out of Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle)This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shiftlock release system. The shift lock release isdesigned to:

• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shiftlever is in PARK (P) with the shift leverbutton fully released, and

• Prevent movement of the shift lever out ofPARK (P) unless the ignition is in a positionother than LOCK.

The shift lock release is always functional exceptin the case of a an uncharged or low voltage(less than 9 volt) battery.

If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or abattery with low voltage, try charging or jumpstarting the battery. See Jump Starting onpage 304 for more information.

To shift out of PARK (P) use the followingsequence:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Then press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.

2. While holding down the brake pedal, pressthe shift lever button again.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

If you still cannot move the shift lever fromPARK (P), consult your dealer or a professionaltowing service.

121

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

122

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

123

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 123.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 243.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle) on page 119.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer (ManualTransaxle) on page 256 or Towing a Trailer(Automatic Transaxle) on page 257.

124

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjustthe mirror so you can see clearly behind yourvehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up ordown and side to side. The control at the bottom ofthe mirror is the day/night feature that allowsadjustment to the mirror so that the glare ofheadlamps from behind is reduced. Push thecontrol for daytime use; pull it for night use.

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

Mirror OperationYour vehicle may have a manual rearview mirrorwith the OnStar® System. You can adjust the mirrorfor day or night driving. Press the tab forward forday driving. Pull the tab back for night driving.

There are also three OnStar® buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 127 formore information about the services OnStar®

provides.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner. Donot spray glass cleaner directly on the mirrorhousing.

Outside Remote Control MirrorAdjust the driver’s outside mirror with the controllever located on the driver’s door. Adjust theoutside mirrors so that the side of the vehicle canbe seen while sitting in a comfortable drivingposition.

To adjust the passenger’s outside mirror, sit in thedriver’s seat and have a passenger adjust themirror for you. The mirror is a manual fold design.

125

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrorsare located on thedriver’s door armrest.

Move the selector switch located below thefour-way control pad to the left or right to chooseeither the driver’s side or passenger’s sidemirror. To adjust a mirror, use the arrows locatedon the four-way control pad to move the mirrorin the desired direction. The mirror will only moveright or left, up or down. Adjust each outsidemirror so that a little of the vehicle and the areabehind it can be seen while sitting in a comfortabledriving position. Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjusting either outsidemirror.

Both mirrors can manually be folded by pullingthem toward the vehicle. This feature maybe useful when going through a car wash or aconfined space. Push the mirrors away from thevehicle, to the normal position, before driving.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat. It also makes thingsappear farther away than they really are.

126

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Terms andConditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1–888–4–ONSTAR (1–888–466–7827)or TTY 1–877–248–2080, or press the OnStar®

button to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours aday, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

127

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®

Plan is included for one year from the date ofpurchase. You can extend this plan beyond thefirst year, or upgrade to the Directions &Connections® Plan. For more information, pressthe OnStar® button to speak with an advisor. SomeOnStar® services (such as Remote Door Unlockor Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may not beavailable until you register with OnStar®.

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Available Services included with Directions& Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be used withOnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-FreeCalling may also be linked to a Verizon Wirelessservice plan, depending on eligibility. To find outmore, refer to the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in thevehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar® advisorby pressing the OnStar® button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

128

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutesto access location-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 214 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

129

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of your radioto hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next to theOnStar® buttons is red, this means that your systemis not functioning properly and should be checkedby a dealer. If the light appears clear (no light isappearing), your OnStar® subscription has expired.You can always press the blue OnStar® button toconfirm that your OnStar® equipment is active.

130

Storage Areas

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by lifting up on the lever.Close the glove box with a firm push.

Cupholder(s)There are two cupholders located at the front ofthe center console, in front of the shift lever. Thereare also cupholders for the rear seat passengerslocated at the rear of the center console.

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle may have a center console armrestwith storage area. Use the lever on the front of theconsole to open it.

Driver’s Storage CompartmentThe driver’s storage compartment is located nearthe left side of the steering column on thebottom of the instrument panel. Pull the coverdown to open. It can be used to store small items.

Convenience NetYour vehicle may have a convenience net. Youwill see it inside the back wall of the trunk.Put small loads behind the net. It can help keepthem from falling over during sharp turns orquick starts and stops.

Unclip a corner of the convenience net to fit largerobjects behind the net, then reclip it to securethem in place. The net is not for larger, heavierloads. Store them in the trunk as far forwardas you can.

You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat whenyou are not using it.

131

Sunroof

If the vehicle has asunroof, the switch thatoperates it is locatedon the headlinerbetween the map lamps.

The sunroof will only operate while the ignition ison, or turned to ACC, or if Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 110.

Press the sunroof switch rearward to open thesunroof to the vent position. If the sunshadeis closed, it must be opened manually in the ventposition. Press and hold the switch rearward asecond time to open the sunroof. If the sunshadeis closed, it will open automatically when thesunroof is opened.

To close the sunroof, press the switch forward andhold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroofwill stop if the switch is released. Close thesunshade by hand.

The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has an electrical failure.

Notice: If you force the sunshade forward ofthe sliding glass panel, damage will occurand the sunroof may not open or closeproperly. Always close the glass panel beforeclosing the sunshade.

132

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 136Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 138Other Warning Devices ............................. 138Horn .......................................................... 138Tilt Wheel .................................................. 139Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 139Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 140Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 140Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 141Windshield Wipers ..................................... 141Windshield Washer .................................... 142Cruise Control ........................................... 143Headlamps ................................................ 146Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 147Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 147Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 147Fog Lamps ................................................ 148Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 148Dome Lamp .............................................. 149Entry/Exit Lighting ...................................... 149Mirror Reading Lamps ............................... 149

Electric Power Management ...................... 149Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 150Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 150Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 151

Climate Controls ......................................... 152Climate Control System ............................. 152Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 155Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 155

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 157Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 158Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 159Tachometer ............................................... 159Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 160Passenger Safety Belt

Reminder Light ....................................... 160Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 161Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 162Charging System Light .............................. 164Up-Shift Light ............................................ 164Brake System Warning Light ..................... 165

Section 3 Instrument Panel

133

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 166Enhanced Traction System

Warning Light ........................................ 166Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ........................................ 167Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 168Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 171Security Light ............................................ 172Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 172Highbeam On Light ................................... 173Fuel Gage ................................................. 173

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 174DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 174DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 177DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 179

Audio System(s) ......................................... 185Setting the Time

(Without Date Display) ........................... 186Setting the Time (With Date Display) ......... 187Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 189Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 194Using an MP3 ........................................... 205XM Radio Messages ................................. 212Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 214Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 214Radio Reception ........................................ 215Care of Your CDs ..................................... 216Care of the CD Player .............................. 216Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 216XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 216

Section 3 Instrument Panel

134

✍ NOTES

135

Instrument Panel Overview

136

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Side Window Outlets. See Climate ControlSystem on page 152.

B. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 155.

C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 139.

D. Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped).See Cruise Control on page 143.

E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 158.

F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 214.

G. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 138.

H. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls.See Windshield Wipers on page 141 andWindshield Washer on page 142.

I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 185.

J. Fog Lamp Button (If Equipped). See FogLamps on page 148.

K. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 98.L. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See

Instrument Panel Brightness on page 148.M. Driver Information Control Button. See Driver

Information Center (DIC) on page 174.N. Horn. See Horn on page 138.O. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). Accessory

Power Outlet (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) andCigarette Lighter on page 151 and AccessoryPower Outlet(s) on page 150.

P. Shift Lever (Manual Shown). See ManualTransaxle Operation on page 116 andAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 113.

Q. Climate Controls. See Climate Control Systemon page 152.

R. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator and HeatedSeats Button (If Equipped). See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 162 andHeated Seats on page 10.

S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 131.

137

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flashon and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key is not inthe ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornTo sound the horn, press the center pad on thesteering wheel.

138

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise the steering wheelto the highest level to give your legs more roomwhen you enter and exit the vehicle.

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheelis located on the left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, pull down the lever. Then movethe wheel to a comfortable position, pull upthe lever to lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 140.

• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 140.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 141.

• O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps onpage 146.

139

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) and twodownward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in the directionof the turn or lanechange.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will returnby itself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrowsflash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out andother drivers will not see your turn signal. If a bulb isburned out, replace it to help avoid an accident.

If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal aturn, check the fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 363.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam to highbeam, push the turn signal lever away from you.

When the high beamsare on, this light onthe instrument panelcluster will also be on.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.

140

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you until the high-beam headlampscome on, then release the lever to turn them off.

Windshield Wipers

Use this lever, located on the right side of thesteering wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn offthe windshield wipers.

& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers):Move the lever to this position for intermittent orspeed sensitive operation. When you select thisposition, the delay will vary depending on thevehicles speed, as well as, the manually selecteddelay.

x (Delay): When the lever is in the intermittentposition, turn the intermittent adjust band with thissymbol on it up or down to set for a shorter orlonger delay between wipes. To the left of theadjust band are bars, increasing in size from bottomto top, that indicate the frequency of the wipes.Smaller bars mean the wipers movement is lessfrequent. Larger bars mean the movement is morefrequent.

6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the firstsetting past intermittent, for steady wiping atlow speed.

1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to thesecond setting past intermittent, for wiping at highspeed.

141

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down to thisposition for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there untilthe windshield wipers start; then let go. Thewindshield wipers will stop after one wiping cycle.If you want additional wiping cycles, hold the leverdown longer.

Damaged wiper blades may prevent you fromseeing well enough to drive safely. To avoiddamage, be sure to clear ice and snow from thewiper blades before using them.

If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If your bladesdo become damaged, get new blades.

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. Ifthe motor gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear awaythe snow or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.

As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on formore than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlampswill turn on automatically. They will turn off15 seconds after the wipers are turned off.

Windshield WasherTo wash your windshield, press the button at theend of the lever until the washers begin.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

When you release the button, the washers willstop, but the wipers will continue to wipe for aboutthree times or will resume the speed you wereusing before.

142

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. This can really help onlong trips. Cruise control does not work at speedsbelow 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you donot want to. You could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the cruise controlswitch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

The cruise controlbuttons are located onthe left side of thesteering wheel.

143

J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruisecontrol system on and off.

RES+ (Resume): Press this button to resume aset speed and to accelerate the speed.

SET– (Set): Press this button to set a speed andto decrease the speed.

To set a speed do the following:

1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise controlon. The indicator light on the button willcome on.

2. Get to the speed you want.

3. Press the SET– part of the control button andrelease it. The CRUISE ENGAGED messagewill appear on the Driver Information Center(DIC) to show the system is engaged.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the vehicle is in cruise control and the TractionControl System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control will automatically disengage. SeeEnhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 226.When road conditions allow, the cruise control canbe used again.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set the cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This, ofcourse, disengages the cruise control. To return tothe previously set speed, you do not need to gothrough the set process again. Once you are goingabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can pressthe RES+ part of the button briefly.

This will take you back up to your previouslychosen speed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.

1. Disengage the cruise control by applying thebrake pedal but do not turn it off. Accelerateto a higher speed and reset the cruise control.

2. If the cruise control system is already engaged,press the RES+ part of the button. Hold it thereuntil you get up to the speed desired, and thenrelease the button. To increase the vehiclespeed in very small amounts, press the RES+part of the button briefly and then release it.Each time you do this, the vehicle will go about1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

144

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlIf the cruise control system is already engaged,

• Push and hold the SET– part of the buttonuntil you reach the lower speed you want,then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, push theSET– part of the button briefly. Each time youdo this, the vehicle will go about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehiclewill slow down to the cruise control speed you setearlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the accelerator pedal tomaintain the vehicle’s speed. When going downhill,you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear tokeep the vehicle’s speed down. Of course, applyingthe brake takes turns off the cruise control. Manydrivers find this to be too much trouble and do notuse cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlTo end cruise control, step lightly on the brakepedal or the clutch pedal if the vehicle hasa manual transaxle.

Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch pedal willonly end the current cruise control session. Pressthe cruise control on/off button to turn the systemcompletely off.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, the cruise control set speed memory iserased.

145

Headlamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp switch has the following fourpositions:

2 (Headlamps): Turn the switch to this positionto turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, andtaillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the switch to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps andtaillamps only.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Turn theswitch to this position to automatically turn on theDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) during daytime, andthe headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps atnight. This position must be selected in order for theWiper Activated Headlamps to be activated. SeeWiper Activated Headlamps on page 147.

P (Off/On): This position is the momentaryOff/On switch for the Automatic Headlamp System.For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transaxlemust be in the PARK (P) position, before theAutomatic Headlamp System can be turned off.

When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of theswitch to off/on will turn off the Automatic HeadlampSystem. Rotating the switch to off/on again will turnthe Automatic Headlamp System back on. TheAutomatic Headlamp System is always turnedon at the beginning of an ignition cycle.

146

Wiper Activated HeadlampsThis feature activates the headlamps and parkinglamps after the windshield wipers are turned on.For this feature to work, automatic lighting mustbe enabled. See Headlamps on page 146 foradditional information.

When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activatedheadlamps will immediately turn off. They will alsoturn off 15 seconds after the windshield wipercontrol is turned off.

Headlamps on ReminderIf you open the driver’s door with the ignition offand the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Make sure it is not covered orthe headlamps will come on when you do notneed them.

The DRL system will make the headlamps come onat reduced intensity when the following conditionsare met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO.

• The light sensor detects daytime light.

• The shift lever is not in PARK (P).

While the DRL system is on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrument panel lights willnot be illuminated.

147

The DRL system will be off any time your vehicle isin PARK (P). The DRL system on U.S. vehicles canalso be turned off by using the off/on switch for oneignition cycle.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

Fog Lamps

If equipped, the foglamp button is locatedon the instrument panel,to the left of thesteering wheel.

The ignition must be on to turn your fog lamps on.

Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. Anindicator light on the cluster will come on when thefog lamps are on. Push the button again to turn thefog lamps off.

The parking lamps will automatically turn on andoff when the fog lamps are turned on and off.

The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beamheadlamps are turned on.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The control for thisfeature is located onthe instrument panel tothe left of the steeringwheel.

Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights orcounterclockwise to dim them.

148

Dome LampYour vehicle may have a dome lamp.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turnthe lamp off, even when a door is opened.

1 (Door): Move the lever to this position to turnthe lamp on whenever a door is opened.

+ (On): Move the lever to this position to turnthe dome lamp on.

Entry/Exit LightingThe lamps inside your vehicle will go on when youopen any door. These lamps will fade out afterabout 20 seconds after all of the doors have beenclosed or when the ignition is turned to RUN. Theselamps will also go on when you press the trunkrelease, unlock symbol button or the horn symbolon the keyless entry system transmitter.

The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on forabout 20 seconds after your key is removed fromthe ignition to provide an illuminated exit.

Mirror Reading LampsYour vehicle may have reading lamps on therearview mirror. Push the button to turn the readinglamps on and off.

Electric Power ManagementThis vehicle has Electric Power Management(EPM), an advanced control system. It estimatesthe battery’s temperature and state of chargeand then adjusts the voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youmay see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

149

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It canincrease engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a battery saver feature designedto protect your vehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition isturned off, the battery rundown protection systemwill automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes.This will avoid draining the battery.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Accessory power outlets can be used to connectelectrical equipment such as a cellular phoneor CB radio.

The accessory power outlet is located in thecenter console, rearward of the shift lever.

To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not inuse, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysturn off electrical equipment when not in useand do not plug in equipment that exceeds themaximum amperage rating.

150

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealer foradditional information on the accessory poweroutlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not use equipment exceeding maximumamperage rating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer before adding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the installation instructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory or accessorybracket from the plug because the poweroutlets are designed for accessory powerplugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarettelighter. To use the lighter, located on the instrumentpanel below the climate controls, push it in all theway and let go. When it is ready, it will pop back outby itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperage rating of15 amperes.

To clean the center console ashtray, remove theentire ashtray and empty it.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignite themand possibly damage your vehicle. Never putflammable items in the ashtray.

151

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle.

OperationTo change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of theair to the instrument panel outlets, and then directsthe remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets and warmer air to thefloor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to thewindshield and side windows.

The left knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost mode. Information on defogging anddefrosting can be found later in this section.

9 (Fan): Turn the center knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. In any setting other than off, the fan will runcontinuously with the ignition on. The fan must beturned on to run the air conditioning compressor.

9 (Off): To turn the fan off, turn the knob all theway counterclockwise to the off position.

Temperature Control: Turn the right knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature inside the vehicle.

Vehicles with Air Conditioning shown,without Air Conditioning similar

152

h (Recirculate): Press this button to preventoutside air and odors from entering the vehicle or tohelp heat or cool the air inside the vehicle morequickly. An indicator light above the button willcome on in this mode. The air conditioningcompressor also comes on. This mode is notavailable for floor, defog and defrost modes. Whenthe recirculation button is pressed, the recirculateindicator light will flash five times and outside air willbe delivered. Operation in this mode during periodsof high humidity and cool outside temperatures mayresult in increased window fogging. If windowfogging is experienced, select the defrost mode.

Outside Air: This mode allows outside air tocirculate through the vehicle. This mode isautomatically active if recirculate is not selected.There is no button for outside air.

# (Air Conditioning): If your vehicle has airconditioning, press this button to turn the airconditioning system on or off. When this button ispressed, an indicator light above the button willcome on to let you know the air conditioningis activated.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for the vehicle to cool down. Italso helps the system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select the recirculation mode.

3. Select air conditioning.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside of the vehicle tobecome too dry. To prevent this from happening,after the air in the vehicle has cooled, turn off therecirculation by pressing the button again.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath your vehiclewhile idling or after turning off the engine. This isnormal.

The air conditioning compressor cannot be turnedon when the fan is off.

153

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climate controlsystem is used properly. There are two modes toclear fog or frost from the windshield and sidewindows. Use the defog mode to clear the windowsof fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Usethe defrost mode to remove fog or frost from thewindshield more quickly. For best results, clear allsnow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.Turn the left knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode directs about half of the airto the windshield and the side window outlets andhalf to the floor outlets. When you select this modethe system runs the air conditioning compressor.To defog the windows faster, turn the temperaturecontrol knob clockwise to the warmest setting.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield, with some air directed to the sidewindow outlets and the floor outlets. When youselect this mode the system runs the airconditioning compressor. To defrost the windowsfaster, turn the temperature control knob clockwiseto the warmest setting.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in RUN.

< (Rear): Press the button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Be sure to clear asmuch snow from the rear window as possible. Anindicator light above the button will come on to letyou know that the rear window defogger isactivated.The rear window defogger will turn off about15 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned onagain, the defogger will only run for about sevenminutes before turning off. If the vehicle is movingfaster than 50 mph (80 kph), the rear defogger willstay on. The defogger can also be turned off bypressing the button again or by turning off theengine.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and the repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decalor anything similar to the defogger grid.

154

Outlet AdjustmentUse the thumbwheels located next to and belowthe air outlets to change the direction of the airflowand to open and close the outlets.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside of yourvehicle more effectively.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterPassenger compartment air, both outside air andrecirculated air, is routed through a passengercompartment filter. The filter removes certainparticles from the air, including pollen and dustparticles. Reductions in airflow, which may occurmore quickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filterneeds to be replaced early.

The filter should be replaced as part of routinescheduled maintenance. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 375 for replacementintervals. See your dealer for details on changingthe filter. To find out what type of filter to use, seeNormal Maintenance Replacement Parts onpage 387.

To access the passenger compartment air filteryou must go through the glove box.

1. Open the glove box and remove all articlesfrom the inside.

2. Tilt the glove box door down by squeezing oneach side of the glove box until the door canbe lowered from its track. Lower the glovebox door.

155

3. Open the passenger compartment air filterdoor by reaching through the opening in theback of the glove box and raising the tab untilthe door can be opened downward.

4. Remove the filter by sliding it out of thehousing.

When installing a new air filter make sure the AIRFLOW arrow is pointing downward. ReverseSteps 1 through 5 making sure the glove box doorsnaps back into place.

156

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures will helpyou locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to your warning lights and gages couldalso save you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As youwill see in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they are working. If youare familiar with this section, you should not bealarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly and even dangerous.So please get to know your warning lightsand gages. They are a big help.

157

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you willneed to drive safely and economically.

United States Version shown, Canada similar

158

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speedin both miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

Your vehicle’s odometer works together with thedriver information center. You can set a Trip A andTrip B odometer. See “Trip Information” underDIC Operation and Displays on page 174.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Simply open the driver’s doorand the mileage will be displayed briefly.

If your vehicle ever needs a new odometerinstalled, the new one will be set to the correctmileage total of the old odometer.

Tachometer

The tachometerdisplays the enginespeed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

159

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, a chimewill sound for several seconds to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts. Thedriver safety belt light will also come on and stay onfor several seconds, then it will flash for severalmore. You should buckle your safety belt.

This chime and light willbe repeated if the driverremains unbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s safety belt is buckled, neither thechime nor the light will come on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightIf equipped, several seconds after the key isturned to RUN or START, a chime will sound forseveral seconds to remind the front passengerto buckle their safety belt. This would only occur ifthe passenger airbag is enabled. See PassengerSensing System on page 73 for more information.The passenger safety belt light will also comeon and stay on for several seconds, then itwill flash for several more.

This chime and lightwill be repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is inmotion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

160

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag’s electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system check includes theairbag sensor, the airbag modules, the wiring andthe crash sensing and diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system, see AirbagSystem on page 64.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.This means the systemis ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

161

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorIf your vehicle has the passenger sensing system,then your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 73.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will light ONand OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for severalseconds as a system check. Then, after severalmore seconds, the status indicator will light eitherON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let youknow the status of the right front passenger’s frontalairbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in thefront.” This is because the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great, if the airbag deploys.


162

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is failsafe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbagstatus indicator, it means that the passengersensing system has turned off the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 73 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbag readinesslight ever come on together, it means thatsomething may be wrong with the airbagsystem. If this ever happens, have thevehicle serviced promptly, because anadult-size person sitting in the rightfront passenger seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 161.

163

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, and the engineis not running, as acheck to show you it isworking.

Then it should go out when the engine is started.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, youmay have a problem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by your dealer. Drivingwhile this light is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Up-Shift LightYour vehicle may have an up-shift light. When thislight comes on, you should shift to the next highergear if weather, road, and traffic conditions allowyou to.

This light is located inyour instrument panelcluster to the left ofthe tachometer.

See Manual Transaxle Operation on page 116 formore information.

United States Only

164

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For good braking,though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turn theignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if thereis a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brakedoes not release fully. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means you have abrake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. Make sure the parkingbrake is fully released. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push or, the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed for service. SeeTowing Your Vehicle on page 254.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.


165

Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight

Your vehicle may havean Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS)warning light.

The ABS warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition key to LOCK. This is normal.If the light does not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.If the light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the lightcomes on when you are driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off. Then start theengine again to reset the system. If the light stillstays on, or comes on again while you are driving,your vehicle needs service. If the regular brakesystem warning light is not on, you still have brakes,but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If the regularbrake system warning light is also on, you do nothave anti-lock brakes and there is a problem withyour regular brakes. See Brake System WarningLight on page 165.

Enhanced Traction SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle isequipped with theEnhanced TractionSystem (ETS), thiswarning light shouldcome on briefly as youstart the engine.

If the warning light does not come on, then have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem.

If the warning light stays on, or comes on when youare driving, there may be a problem with yourEnhanced Traction System and your vehicle mayneed service. When this warning light is on, thesystem will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

166

The Enhanced Traction System warning light maycome on for the following reasons:

• If you turn the system off by moving the shiftlever to LOW (L), the warning light will come onand stay on. To turn the system back on, movethe shift lever back to a position other thanLOW (L). The warning light should go off.See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 226 for more information.

• The warning light will come on when you setyour parking brake with the engine running, andit will stay on if your parking brake does notrelease fully. If the transaxle shift lever is in anyposition other than LOW (L) and the warninglight stays on after your parking brake is fullyreleased, it means there is a problem with thesystem.

• If the traction control system is affected by anengine-related problem, the system will turn offand the warning light will come on.

If the Enhanced Traction System warning lightcomes on and stays on for an extended period oftime when the transaxle shift lever is in any positionother than LOW (L), your vehicle needs service.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight will come onwhen the engine hasoverheated.

If this happens you should pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 290 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on could cause yourvehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheating onpage 290. Your vehicle could be damaged, andit might not be covered by your warranty. Neverdrive with the engine coolant temperaturewarning light on.

This light will also come on when starting yourvehicle. If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.

167

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, andemission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The check engine light comes onto indicate that there is a problem and service isrequired. Malfunctions often will be indicated by thesystem before any problem is apparent. This mayprevent more serious damage to your vehicle.This system is also designed to assist your servicetechnician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehiclewith this light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system ofyour vehicle or the replacement of the originaltires with other than those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) can affect yourvehicle’s emission controls and may causethis light to come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 268.

168

This light should come on, as a check to show you itis working, when the ignition is on and the engine isnot running. If the light does not come on, have itrepaired. This light will also come on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosisand service may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park yourvehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 secondsand restart the engine. If the light remains onsteady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. Ifthe light is still flashing, follow the previous steps,and see your dealer for service as soon aspossible.

169

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 274.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle ofwater?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 270. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice thisas stalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.(These conditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

170

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection.This can happen if you have recently replacedyour battery or if your battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.This may take several days of routine driving. If youhave done this and your vehicle still does not passthe inspection for lack of OBD system readiness,your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

If you have a low engineoil pressure problem,this light will stay on afteryou start your engine, orcome on when you aredriving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil.

The engine could be low on oil, or could havesome other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.

The oil light could also come on in three othersituations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test to showyou it is working, but the light will go out whenyou turn the ignition to START. If it does notcome on with the ignition on, you may have aproblem with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixedright away.

171

• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light mayblink on and then off.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may come onfor a moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

Security Light

For informationregarding this light,see Theft-DeterrentSystems on page 102.

Fog Lamp Light

If equipped, the foglamps light will comeon when the fog lampsare in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 148 for moreinformation.

172

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 140.

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage tells youabout how much fuelyou have left.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn a corneror speed up.

• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when youturn off the ignition.

For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 369.

173

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC). The DIC display gives you the status ofmany of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is alsoused to display driver personalization menu modesand warning/status messages. All messages willappear in the DIC display, located at the bottom ofthe instrument panel cluster.

The DIC buttons arelocated on the left sideof the steering wheel.

q (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the vehicle information mode displays.

r (Reset): Press this button to reset somevehicle information mode displays, select apersonalization menu mode setting, oracknowledge a warning message.

Press and hold the information and reset buttonsat the same time for one second, then releasethe buttons to enter the personalization menu.See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 179 formore information.

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is on. TheDIC has different modes which can be accessedby pressing the DIC buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following.

174

Information Modes

q (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the following vehicle information modes:

Outside Air Temperature and OdometerPress the information button until the outside airtemperature and the odometer are displayed. Thismode shows the temperature outside of the vehiclein either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degreesCelsius (°C) and the total distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).The outside air temperature will appear on the leftside of the DIC display and the odometer willappear on the right side of the display.

To change the DIC display to English or metricunits, see “UNITS” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 179.

TRIP A or TRIP BPress the information button until TRIP A or TRIP Bis displayed. These modes show the currentdistance traveled since the last reset for each tripodometer in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).Both odometers can be used at the same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing and holding the reset button for afew seconds while the desired trip odometeris displayed.

FUEL RANGEPress the information button until FUEL RANGE isdisplayed. This mode shows the remaining distanceyou can drive without refueling in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy andthe fuel remaining in the tank.

When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOWwill display.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuelrange is an average of recent driving conditions.As your driving conditions change, this data isgradually updated. The FUEL RANGE modecannot be reset.

175

ECON (Economy)Press the information button until ECON isdisplayed. This mode shows how many miles pergallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)your vehicle is getting based on current and pastdriving conditions.

Press and hold the reset button while ECON isdisplayed to reset the average fuel economy.Average fuel economy will then be calculatedstarting from that point. If the average fuel economyis not reset, it will be continually updated each timeyou drive.

AV (Average) SPEEDPress the information button until AV SPEED isdisplayed. This mode shows the vehicle’s averagespeed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h).

Press and hold the reset button while AV SPEEDis displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.

OIL LIFEPress the information button until OIL LIFE isdisplayed. The engine oil life system shows anestimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It willshow 100% when the system is reset after an oilchange. It will alert you to change your oil on aschedule consistent with your driving conditions.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenance is recommendedin the Maintenance Schedule in this manual.See Engine Oil on page 279 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 375.

Always reset the engine oil life system after an oilchange. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystem” under Engine Oil Life System onpage 282.

COOLANTPress the information button until COOLANT isdisplayed. This mode shows the temperature of theengine coolant in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) ordegrees Celsius (°C).

176

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problemdetected in one of your vehicle’s systems.

A message will clear when the vehicle’s conditionis no longer present. To acknowledge a messageand clear it from the display, press and holdany of the DIC buttons. If the condition is stillpresent, the warning message will come back onthe next time the vehicle is turned off and backon. With most messages, a warning chime soundswhen the message displays. Your vehicle mayhave other warning messages.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFFThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is disabled with the headlamp switch.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ONThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is enabled with the headlamp switch.

BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays to inform the driver that thebrake fluid level is low while the ignition is on.The brake system warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster also comes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 165 for more information.Have the brake system serviced by your dealeras soon as possible.

CHANGE OIL SOONThis message displays when the life of the engineoil has expired and it should be changed.

When you acknowledge the CHANGE OIL SOONmessage by clearing it from the display, you stillmust reset the engine oil life system separately.See Engine Oil Life System on page 282 andScheduled Maintenance on page 375 for moreinformation.

CHECK GAS CAPThis message displays if the fuel cap has not beenfully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make surethat it is on properly. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn the message off.

177

COOLING MODE ONThis message may display on some vehicles.Under severe conditions, hot ambienttemperatures, steep grades, and towing, yourvehicle may experience more transaxle shifting.This is temporary and normal under theseconditions. This does not require engine ortransaxle service.

CRUISE ENGAGEDThis message displays when the cruise controlsystem is active. See Cruise Control on page 143for more information.

DOOR AJARThis message displays if one or more of thevehicle’s doors are not closed properly. When thismessage displays, make sure that the door(s)are closed completely.

ENGINE DISABLEDThis message displays if the starting of the engineis disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately.

ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCEDThis message displays to inform you that thevehicle has reduced engine power to avoiddamaging the engine. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. Ifthis message is on, but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should be takento your dealer for service as soon as possible.

ICE POSSIBLEThis message displays when the outside airtemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOWThis message displays if the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replacethe battery in the transmitter. See “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 87.

178

LOW FUELThis message displays when your vehicle is lowon fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 173, Fuel on page 270,and Filling the Tank on page 274 for moreinformation.

LOW TRACTIONThis message displays when the EnhancedTraction System (ETS) is actively limiting wheelspin. Slippery road conditions may exist if thismessage displays, so adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS)on page 226 for more information.

PARKING BRAKEThis message displays if the parking brake is leftengaged. See Parking Brake on page 118 formore information.

POWER STEERINGThis message displays if a problem has beendetected with the electric power steering. Haveyour vehicle serviced by your dealer immediately.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problemwith the airbag system. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately.

TRUNK AJARThis message displays when the trunk lid is notclosed completely. Make sure that the trunklid is closed completely. See Trunk on page 98.

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle has personalization capabilities thatallow you to program certain features to a preferredsetting. All of the features listed may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the featuresavailable will be displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for the features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory, but may havebeen changed from their default state sincethat time.

179

To change feature settings, use the followingprocedure:

Entering Personalization Menu1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is

stopped.To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press and hold the information andreset buttons at the same time forone second, then release to enter thepersonalization menu.If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph(3 km/h), only the UNITS menu will beaccessible.

3. Press the information button to scroll throughthe available personalization menu modes.Press the reset button to scroll throughthe available settings for each mode.If you do not make a selection withinten seconds, the display will go back to theprevious information displayed.

Personalization Menu ModesOIL LIFE RESETWhen this feature is displayed, you can reset theengine oil life system. To reset the system, seeEngine Oil Life System on page 282. See “OILLIFE” under DIC Operation and Displays onpage 174 for more information.

UNITSThis feature allows you to select the units ofmeasurement in which the DIC will display thevehicle information. When UNITS appears on thedisplay, press and hold the reset button for atleast one second to scroll through the availablesettings:

ENGLISH (default in United States): Allinformation will be displayed in English units.For example, distance will be shown in miles (mi)and fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg).

METRIC (default in Canada): All information willbe displayed in metric units. For example, distancewill be shown in kilometers (km) and fuel economyin liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).

180

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and move on tothe next feature.

LOCK HORNIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn tochirp every time the lock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.When LOCK HORN appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at least onesecond to scroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the firstpress of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.The horn will still chirp on the second press.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of thelock button on the RKE transmitter.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 87 for more information.


UNLOCK HORNIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirpon the first press of the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter, can be enabled or disabled. WhenUNLOCK HORN appears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at least one second toscroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when theunlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press ofthe unlock button on the RKE transmitter.


Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and move onto the next feature.

181

LIGHT FLASHIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exteriorhazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time thelock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on the RKEtransmitter are pressed, can be enabled ordisabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on thedisplay, press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting willnot flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk releasebuttons on the RKE transmitter are pressed.

ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signallighting will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunkrelease buttons on the RKE transmitter arepressed.



DELAY LOCKThis feature, which delays the actual locking of thevehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAYLOCK appears on the display, press and hold thereset button for at least one second to scrollthrough the available settings:

ON (default): The doors will not lock untilfive seconds after the last door is closed. You cantemporarily override delayed locking by pressingthe power lock switch or the lock button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter asecond time.

OFF: The doors will lock immediately whenpressing the power lock switch or the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter.

See Power Door Locks on page 95, DelayedLocking on page 95, and Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation on page 87 for moreinformation.


182

AUTO UNLK (Unlock)This feature, which allows the vehicle toautomatically unlock certain doors, can be enabledor disabled. When AUTO UNLK appears on thedisplay, press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

ALL (default): All of the doors will automaticallyunlock.

DRIVER: The driver’s door will automaticallyunlock.

NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.You will need to manually unlock the doors.

If you have a manual transaxle vehicle, the door(s)will automatically unlock when the ignition isturned off.

If you have an automatic transaxle vehicle, you canselect when the automatic unlocking will occur.See “UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transaxle Only)”following.

See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock onpage 96 for more information.


UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transaxle Only)This screen displays only if your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle and DRIVER or ALL isselected for the AUTO UNLK feature. This featuredetermines when the automatic door unlocking willoccur. When UNLK appears on the display, pressand hold the reset button for at least one second toscroll through the available settings:

KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the keyis turned off.

SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock onpage 96 for more information.


183

EXT (Exterior) LIGHTSIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exteriorperimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter is pressed, canbe enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTSappears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn onwhen the unlock button on the RKE transmitter ispressed.

ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting willturn on when the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed.



LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC will display. When LANGUAGEappears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

ENGLISH (default): The DIC will display allinformation in English.

FRENCH: The DIC will display all information inFrench.

SPANISH: The DIC will display all information inSpanish.

GERMAN: The DIC will display all information inGerman.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and exit outof the personalization menu mode.

184

Exiting Personalization MenuThe personalization menu will be exited when anyof the following conditions occur:

• A ten second time period has elapsed.

• The ignition is turned off.

• The end of the personalization menu list isreached.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for a saferdriving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 218. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’s audiosystem, you can use it with less effort, as well astake advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio systemby presetting your favorite radio stations,setting the tone and adjusting the speakers.

Then, when driving conditions permit, you can tuneto your favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 218.

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

185

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits. If sound equipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 110 for more information.

Setting the Time(Without Date Display)If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with asingle CD player and preset buttons numberedone through six, the radio will have a clock buttonfor setting the time. You can set the time byfollowing these steps:

1. Press the clock button until the hour numbersbegin flashing on the display. Press the clockbutton a second time and the minutenumbers will begin flashing on the display.

2. While either the hour or the minute numbersare flashing, turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decreasethe time.

186

3. Press the clock button again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set the currentlydisplayed time; otherwise, the flashing willstop after five seconds and the currenttime displayed will be automatically set.

To change the time default setting from 12 hourto 24 hour, press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrow label.Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed, pressthe pushbutton located under the desired option toselect the default. Press the clock button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

Setting the Time (With Date Display)If your vehicle has a radio with a single CDplayer, the radio has a clock button for setting thetime and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, andyear) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turn thetune knob, located on the upper right side ofthe radio, to adjust the selected setting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the clockbutton when the radio is on. The date with displaytimes out after a few seconds and goes back tothe normal radio and time display.

If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio has a MENU button instead ofthe clock button to set the time and date.

187

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption is displayed.

3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turn thetune knob, located on the upper right side ofthe radio, to adjust the selected setting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the MENU buttonand then the clock button when the radio is on. Thedate with display times out after a few seconds andgoes back to the normal radio and time display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default settingfrom month/day/year to day/month/year, followthese instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrowlabel. Once the time 12H and 24H, andthe date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock or MENU button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

188

Radio with CD (Base)

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

The radio goes to the previous volume settingwhenever the radio is turned on. The volume canstill be adjusted by using the volume knob.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

189

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for three seconds until a beepsounds. When that pushbutton is pressed andreleased, the station that was set, returns.

5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for eachpushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass ortreble, press the tune knob or the BASS/TREBLEpushbutton until the desired tone control labeldisplays. Turn the tune knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thesetting. The current bass or treble level displays.If a station’s frequency is weak, or has static,decrease the treble.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to adjustBASS and TREBLE Settings.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust thebalance or fade, press this button or the tune knobuntil the desired speaker control label displays.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the setting.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for your vehicleand it must be returned to your dealer for service.

Loc (Locked): This message is displayed whilethe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

190

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Careof Your CDs on page 216 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught inthe CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label is needed,try labeling the top of the recorded CD with amarking pen.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectthe CD. If the CD is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD automatically pulls back intothe player.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

191

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track, if more than tenseconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrowto go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is heldor pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly. You will hear soundat a reduced volume. Release this pushbuttonto resume playing the track. The elapsed time ofthe track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thispushbutton to advance playback quickly. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, youcan listen to CD tracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, do the following:

1. Press this button to play tracks from theCD you are listening to in random order.The random icon displays.

2. Press this button again to turn off random play.The random icon disappears from the display.

RPT (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one trackcan be repeated.

To repeat the track you are listening to, press andrelease the RPT button. An arrow symbol displays.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the track number, elapsed time ofthe track, and the time. When the ignition is off,press this button to display the time.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon andtrack number displays while a CD is in the player.Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice such as a portable audio player.

192

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displaysand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD-R.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer while reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate. Thisis not an audio output; do not plug the headphoneset into the front auxiliary input jack. You canhowever, connect an external audio device such asan iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer,or cassette tape player, etc. to the auxiliary inputjack for use as another source for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 218 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary inputjack. When a device is connected, press the radioCD/AUX button to begin playing audio from thedevice over the car speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need tomake additional volume adjustments from theportable device.

193

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Aux” displays.

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio withSix-Disc CD (MP3) similar

194

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).The RDS feature is available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information. Thissystem relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only works when theinformation is available. While the radio is tuned toan FM-RDS station, the station name or call lettersappears on the display. In rare cases, a radiostation can broadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channelsincluding music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and textinformation that includes song title and artist name.A service fee is required in order to receive theXM™ service. For more information, contact XM™;In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada atwww.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR(438-9677).

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhileSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise as yourspeed changes while driving. That way, the volumelevel should sound about the same as youdrive. To activate SCV:1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.2. Press the MENU button to display the radio

setup menu.3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM

(automatic volume) label on the radio display.4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed

Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med(medium), or High) to select the level of radiovolume compensation. The display times outafter approximately 10 seconds. Each highersetting allows for more radio volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds.

195

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radiostations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrowto go to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes on to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3song. A choice of additional information such as:Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) candisplay. Continue pressing the information button tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under any one of the labels and theinformation about that label displays.

While information is not available, No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to yourfavorite stations using the presets, favorites button,and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has thisfeature. See Defensive Driving on page 218.

196

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, each havingsix favorite stations available per page. Each pageof favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM,or XM™ (if equipped) stations. To store a station asa favorite, perform the following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. When that pushbuttonis pressed and released, the station that wasset, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radio screenshowing the radio station frequency labels andto begin the process of programming yourfavorites for the chosen amount of numberedpages.

197

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tuneknob until the tone control labels display. Continuepressing to highlight the desired label, or press thepushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turnthe tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise toadjust the highlighted setting. The highlightedsetting can be adjusted by pressing either theSEEK, FWD (forward) or REV (reverse) buttonuntil the desired levels are obtained. If a station’sfrequency is weak, or has static, decrease thetreble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjuststo the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual displays or start to manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance orfade, press the tune knob until the speaker controllabels display. Continue pressing to highlight thedesired label, or press the pushbutton positionedunder the desired label. Turn the tune knobclockwise or counterclockwise to adjust thehighlighted setting. The highlighted setting can beadjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD, orREV button until the desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds. Abeep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.

198

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency is displayed. Press the CAT buttonto display the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category displays or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio does not let you to remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving faster than5 mph (8 km/h).

199

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for your vehicleand it must be returned to your dealer for service.

Locked: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 212 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button for twoseconds. You will hear a beep and LoadAll Discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

200

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displayson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Careof Your CDs on page 216 for more information.


Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time,or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. Whenusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught inthe CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recorded CD with amarking pen.


201

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.If the CD is not removed after several seconds,the CD automatically pulls back into the player andbegins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theeject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track, if more than tenseconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrowto go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is held,or pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the trackson the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly. You will hear sound ata reduced volume. Release this pushbutton toresume playing the track. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release this buttonto resume playing the track. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, you canlisten to the tracks in random, rather than sequentialorder, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player.To use random, do one of the following:

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CDplayer, insert a disc partway into the slot of theCD player. A RDM label displays.To play the tracks from the single CD in randomorder, press the pushbutton positioned underthe RDM label until Random Current Discdisplays. Press the pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

202

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-discCD player, press and hold the LOAD button.A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.Insert one or more discs partway into the slot ofthe CD player.To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button toplay a CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playingan MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more informationon how to play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, seeUsing an MP3 on page 205 later in this section.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displaysand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

203

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer while reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 218 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary inputjack. When a device is connected, press the radioCD/AUX button to begin playing audio from thedevice over the vehicle’s speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need tomake additional volume adjustments from theportable device.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues to play, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing. Pressthis button again and the system begins to playaudio from the connected portable audio player.If a portable audio player is not connected, “No AuxInput Device” displays.

204

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recordedwith the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.Song title, artist name, and album can displaywhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3 files. By default the radio reads only theuncompressed audio and ignores the MP3 files.Pressing the CAT (category) button togglesbetween compressed and uncompressed audioformat.

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• The CD player is able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album. Eachfolder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support upto 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in tryingto locate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions may not work).

205

• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, ora combination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists can cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlists,or sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display, and might notfully display.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc cancause the disc not to function in the player.

Change playlists by using the previous and nextfolder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. If a CD-R containsmore than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,and 255 files, the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are not accessible.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as a folder.If the root directory has compressed audio files, thedirectory displays as F1 ROOT. All files containeddirectly under the root directory are accessed priorto any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px)are always accessed before root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. The next andprevious folder functions are not displayed on aCD-R that was recorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

206

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder down andthe folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first andthen goes to the root folder. When the radiodisplays the name of the folder, the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode was chosen as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name thatis contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays thefile name without the extension (such as .mp3) asthe track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or fourpages are shortened. Parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension of the filename doesnot display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software, can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

207

Playing an MP3Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CDPlayer), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),label side up. The player pulls it in, and theCD-R should begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-Rin the player, it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-size CD-Rsand the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting.

If these problems occur, check the bottom surfaceof the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD willnot play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled,see Care of Your CDs on page 216 for moreinformation.


Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught inthe CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recorded CD with amarking pen.


208

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep will soundand Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc isejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R can beremoved. If the CD-R is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD-R automatically pulls back into theplayer and begins playing. For the Six-Disc CDplayer, press and hold the eject button fortwo seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more than tenseconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrowto go to the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow isheld or pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through MP3 files onthe CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the file. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.

209

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3files on the CD-R can be played in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD-R or all discsin a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

1. To play MP3 files in random order from theCD-R that is currently playing, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Random Current Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order byartist or album. Press the pushbutton located belowthe music navigator label. The player scans thedisc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the number of MP3 filesrecorded to the CD-R. The radio can begin playingwhile it is scanning the disc in the background.When the scan is finished, the CD-R beginsplaying again.

Once the disc has been scanned, the playerdefaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist. Thecurrent artist playing is shown on the second line ofthe display between the arrows. Once all songs bythat artist are played, the player moves to the nextartist in alphabetical order on the CD-R and beginsplaying MP3 files by that artist. If you want to listento MP3 files by another artist, press the pushbuttonlocated below either arrow button. The CD goes tothe next or previous artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either button until the desiredartist displays.

210

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, push one of thebuttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. The album namedisplays on the second line between the arrows andsongs from the current album and begins to play.Once all songs from that album are played, theplayer moves to the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R and begins playing MP3 filesfrom that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbuttonbelow the Back label to return to normal MP3playback.


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon and amessage showing disc and/or track numberdisplays while a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.

211

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

Channel Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/ProgramTitle not available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

212

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No CAT Info Category Name notavailable

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Theft Locked Theftlock® active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messagedisplays after having your vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

213

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discouragetheft of your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio is moved toa different vehicle, it will not operate and LOCK orLOCKED will appear on the display.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Radio controls arelocated on the right sideof the steering wheel.If your vehicle has thisfeature, some audiocontrols can be adjustedat this location. Theyinclude the following:

x w: Press the up or the down arrow to go tothe next or to the previous stored radio station andstay there. Press and hold the up or down arrowlonger than three-quarters of a second to advanceto the next or previous station with a strongsignal in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press the up or thedown arrow to go to the next or previous track.Press and hold the up or down arrow longer thanthree-quarters of a second to continue advancingahead or reversing back, to other tracks withinthe disc.

214

+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button toincrease or to decrease the volume.

g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button tosilence the system. Press this button again to turnthe sound on. If your vehicle is equipped withOnStar®, press and hold this button for two secondsto activate voice on the OnStar system. See theOnStar® System on page 127 in this manual formore information.

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interferenceand static during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devices areplugged into the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other.

For better radio reception, most AM radio stationsboosts the power levels during the day, andthen reduce these levels during the night. Static canalso occur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsreach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tallbuildings or hills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fade in and out. Inaddition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnels can cause loss of theXM™ signal for a period of time. The radio coulddisplay NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.

215

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly or not at all. If thesurface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free clothor dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.Make sure the wiping process starts from the centerto the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the fender. If tightening is required,tighten by hand, then with a wrench onequarter turn.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemYour vehicle may have the XM™ Satellite Radioantenna that is located on the trunk of yourvehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and icebuild up for clear radio reception.

216

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 218Defensive Driving ...................................... 218Drunken Driving ........................................ 219Control of a Vehicle .................................. 222Braking ...................................................... 222Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 223Braking in Emergencies ............................. 225Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .............. 226Steering .................................................... 227Off-Road Recovery .................................... 230Passing ..................................................... 230Loss of Control .......................................... 232Driving at Night ......................................... 234Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 235City Driving ............................................... 238

Freeway Driving ........................................ 239Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 240Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 241Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 241Winter Driving ........................................... 243If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 248Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 248Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 249

Towing ........................................................ 254Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 254Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 254Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle) ......... 256Towing a Trailer

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 257

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

217

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 16.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

218

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

219

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of hersame body weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

220

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driver who willnot drink.

221

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make yourvehicle go where you want it to go. They arethe brakes, the steering, and the accelerator.All three systems have to do their work atthe places where the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. SeeEnhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 226.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 268.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 165.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

222

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while youare driving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harderto push down. If the engine stops, you will stillhave some power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist isused up, it may take longer to stop and the brakepedal will be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light on theinstrument panel willcome on briefly whenyou start your vehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you beginto drive away, your ABS will check itself. You mayhear a momentary motor or clicking noise whilethis test is going on, and you may even notice thatyour brake pedal moves or pulses a little. Thisis normal.

223

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling,the computer will separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

224

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard andhold it down — may be the wrong thing to do.Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, thevehicle cannot respond to your steering.

Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it washeaded when the wheels stopped rolling. Thatcould be off the road, into the very thing you weretrying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want tosqueeze the brakes hard without locking thewheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding, easeoff the brake pedal. This will help you retainsteering control. If you do have ABS, it is different.See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 223.

In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

225

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)Your vehicle may have an Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This isespecially useful in slippery road conditions.The system operates only if it senses that oneor both of the front wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens,the system reduces engine power and mayalso upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin.You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

A LOW TRACTION message will appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC) when the tractioncontrol system is actively limiting wheel spin.Slippery road conditions may exist if this messageis displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when theEnhanced Traction System begins to limit wheelspin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. When road conditions allow you tosafely use it again, you may re-engage the cruisecontrol. See Cruise Control on page 143.

When the system is on,this warning light willcome on to let you knowthere’s a problem.

If the warning light stays on, or comes on whenyou’re driving, there may be a problem withyour Enhanced Traction System and your vehiclemay need service. When this warning light ison, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

The Enhanced Traction System warning light maycome on for the following reasons:

• If you turn the system off by moving theshift lever to LOW (L), the warning lightwill come on and stay on. To turn the systemback on, move the shift lever back to aposition other than LOW (L). The warning lightshould go off.

226

• The warning light will come on when you setyour parking brake with the engine running,and it will stay on if your parking brakedoes not release fully. If the transaxle shiftlever is in any position other than LOW (L) andthe warning light stays on after your parkingbrake is fully released, it means there isa problem with the system.

• If the traction control system is affected by anengine related problem, the system will turnoff and the warning light will come on.

If the Enhanced Traction System warning lightcomes on and stays on for an extended period oftime when the transaxle shift lever is in anyposition other than LOW (L), your vehicle needsservice.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 268 for more information.

Steering

Electric Power SteeringIf the engine stalls while you are driving, thepower steering assist system will continueto operate until you are able to stop your vehicle.If you lose power steering assist because theelectric power steering system is not functioning,you can steer, but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel in either directionseveral times until it stops, or hold the steeringwheel in the stopped position for an extendedamount of time, you may notice a reduced amountof power steering assist. The normal amount ofpower steering assist should return shortly after afew normal steering movements.

The electric power steering system does notrequire regular maintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems and/or the POWERSTEERING message comes on, contactyour dealer for service repairs. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 177.

227

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control. See Enhanced Traction System(ETS) on page 226.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” throughthe curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.


228

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you come overa hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked cars and stops right infront of you. You can avoid these problems bybraking — if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou cannot; there is not room. That is the time forevasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes — but, unlessyou have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lockyour wheels.

See Braking on page 222. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

229

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so that your vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement.

You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarterturn until the right front tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerousmove, since the passing vehicle occupies thesame lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

230

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the rightlane and do not get too close. Time your moveso you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, you will have a runningstart that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancelyour pass, you need only slow down and dropback again and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

231

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and start your left lanechange signal before moving out of the rightlane to pass. When you are far enough aheadof the passed vehicle to see its front in yourvehicle’s inside mirror, activate the rightlane change signal and move back into theright lane. Remember that your vehicle’spassenger side outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at atime on two-lane roads. Reconsider beforepassing the next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps arenot flashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

232

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If you have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS),remember: It helps to avoid only the accelerationskid. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS)on page 226. If you do not have the EnhancedTraction System, or if the system is off, thenan acceleration skid is also best handled by easingyour foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid.If you do not have ABS, then in a brakingskid, where the wheels are no longer rolling,release enough pressure on the brakes to get thewheels rolling again. This restores steeringcontrol. Push the brake pedal down steadily whenyou have to stop suddenly. As long as thewheels are rolling, you will have steering control.

233

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

234

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less ofa roadway when you are in a turn or curve.Keep your eyes moving; that way, it is easier topick out dimly lighted objects. Just as theheadlamps should be checked regularly forproper aim, so should your eyes beexamined regularly. Some drivers suffer fromnight blindness — the inability to see in dimlight —and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turnas well because your tire-to-road traction is notas good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do nothave much tread left, you will get even lesstraction. It is always wise to go slower and becautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.The surface may get wet suddenly when yourreflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

235

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They maynot work as well in a quick stop and maycause pulling to one side. You could losecontrol of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

236

Driving Through Deep Standing WaterNotice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through your engine’s air intake andbadly damage your engine. Never drive throughwater that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive through themvery slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.



As little as six inches of flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore policewarning signs, and otherwise be verycautious about trying to drive throughflowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. SeeTires on page 320.

237

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 239.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

238

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

239

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.

Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all acrossNorth America. They will be ready and willing tohelp if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

240

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,with a comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

241

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you canclimb the hill better.

242

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in the trunk.

Also see Tires on page 320.

243

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

244

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

If you have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS), itwill improve your ability to accelerate when drivingon a slippery road. Even though your vehicle hasthis system, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to the road conditions. See EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 226.

If your vehicle does not have ETS, accelerategently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If youaccelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spinand polish the surface under the tires even more.

Unless your vehicle has the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), you will want to brake very gently,too. If your vehicle does have ABS, see Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) on page 223. ABS improvesyour vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road.

Whether your vehicle has ABS or not, you will wantto begin stopping sooner than you would on drypavement. Without ABS, if you feel your vehiclebegin to slide, let up on the brakes a little. Push thebrake pedal down steadily to get the most tractionyou can.

Remember, unless your vehicle has ABS, if youbrake so hard that the wheels stop rolling,your vehicle will just slide. Brake so the wheelsalways keep rolling and you can still steer.

• Whatever the braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

245

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap around yourselfor tuck under your clothing to keep warm. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be

careful.

246

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so you mightnot know it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run the engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restartthe vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withthe headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

247

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transaxle orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transaxle back and forth, you can destroythe transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 248.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 336.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R)and a forward gear, or with a manual transaxle,between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) andREVERSE (R), spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it may need to be towed out.If your vehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing Your Vehicle on page 254.

248

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and the Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label either attached above the door lock postfor a two door vehicle or below the door lock postfor a four door vehicle. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows the number of occupantseating positions (A), and the maximum vehiclecapacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

Label Example

249

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe tire size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation see Tireson page 320 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 327.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer (Manual Transaxle) on page 256 orTowing a Trailer (Automatic Transaxle)on page 257 for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

250

Item Description Total

A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

251




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label, found onthe rear edge of the driver’s door, tells youthe gross weight capacity of your vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out. See “Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in this section.

Example 3

252

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to.

253

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 399.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind amotorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle — such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment,many vehicles can be towed in these ways.See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to considerbefore you do recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you will want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 240.

254

Dinghy TowingYou may dinghy tow your vehicle from the frontfollowing these steps:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition key to ACC to unlock thesteering wheel.

3. Shift an automatic transaxle to NEUTRAL (N)or a manual transaxle to NEUTRAL.

4. Release the parking brake.

To prevent the battery from draining while thevehicle is being towed, remove the following fusefrom the floor console fuse block: 8 (IgnitionSwitch, PASS-Key® III+). See Floor Console FuseBlock on page 364 for more information.

Remember to reinstall the fuse once you havereached your destination.

Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) whiletowing your vehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towingyour vehicle.

255

Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairs would notbe covered by the warranty. Never have yourvehicle towed from the rear.

Dolly TowingYour vehicle cannot be dolly towed, but can bedinghy towed. See “Dinghy Towing” earlier inthis section.

Notice: Dolly towing your vehicle maycause damage because of reduced groundclearance. Always tow your vehicle using thedinghy towing procedure listed in thissection or put your vehicle on a flatbed truck.

Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle)Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is equippedwith a manual transaxle.

256

Towing a Trailer(Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if you havefollowed all the steps in this section. Askyour dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped withan automatic transaxle and the proper trailer towingequipment. If your vehicle is not equipped as statedpreviously, do not tow a trailer. To identify thetrailering capacity of your vehicle, you should readthe information in “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section. Trailering is differentthan just driving your vehicle by itself. Traileringmeans changes in handling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct equipment, and it has to beused properly.

That is the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forcedto work harder against the drag of the addedweight. The engine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat. Also, the trailer addsconsiderably to wind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements.

257

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you will be driving.A good source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch dealer about sway controls.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicleis driven. Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps your engine and other partsof your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Do not drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

• Do not tow when the outside air temperatureis above 100°F (38°C).

• Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km)per year.

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• The weight of the trailer

• The weight of the trailer tongue

• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs(450 kg). But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have on yourvehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

258

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice. Also, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 397 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengers,or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.

And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongueload to the GVW because your vehicle will becarrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 249 for more information aboutyour vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailertongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent ofthe total loaded trailer weight (B).

After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they are not, you may beable to get them right simply by moving someitems around in the trailer.

259

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. You will find these numbers onthe Tire-Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 249. Then be sure you do notgo over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including theweight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you will need theright hitch. Here are some rules to follow:• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not

intended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does notattach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the bodyof your vehicle when you install a trailerhitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holeslater when you remove the hitch. If you donot seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.See Engine Exhaust on page 123. Dirt andwater can also enter the vehicle.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure toread and follow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so you will be able to install, adjust andmaintain them properly. Do not try to tap into yourvehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brakesystems will not work well, or at all.

260

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailermoving and then apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure the brakes are working.This lets you check your electrical connection atthe same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou will need more passing distance up aheadwhen you are towing a trailer. And, because thevehicle is a good deal longer, you will need to gomuch farther beyond the passed vehicle before youcan return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, justmove that hand to the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right. Always back upslowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

261

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you are turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailer will notstrike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees orother objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers.Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.Check with your dealer. The arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever yousignal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps will also flash, telling otherdrivers you are about to turn, change lanesor stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It is important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving on GradesNotice: Do not tow on steep continuousgrades exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended,higher than normal engine and transaxletemperatures may result and damage yourvehicle. Frequent stops are very important toallow the engine and transaxle to cool.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdo not shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot andno longer work well.

Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If theindicator is in the red area, turn off the airconditioning to reduce engine load. See EngineOverheating on page 290.

262

When towing under severe conditions such as hotambient temperatures or steep grades, yourvehicle may experience more transaxle shifting.A COOLING MODE ON message may also appearin the DIC. This alerts the driver that the shiftingmode is in progress and is aiding engine cooling.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 177DIC Warnings and Messages for more information.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here is how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift intoPARK (P) for an automatic transaxle, or intogear for a manual transaxle. When parkinguphill, turn your wheels away from thecurb. When parking downhill, turn your wheelsinto the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake, and then shift into PARK (P) foran automatic transaxle or REVERSE (R) for amanual transaxle.

5. Release the regular brakes.

263

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• Start your engine.

• Shift into a gear.

• Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou are pulling a trailer. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 375 for more on this.Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transaxle fluid (do notoverfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system andbrake system.

Each of these is covered in this manual, and theIndex will help you find them quickly. If youare trailering, it is a good idea to review thisinformation before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 290.

264

Service ........................................................ 268Accessories and Modifications ................... 268California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 269Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 269Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 270Fuel ............................................................. 270

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 270Gasoline Specifications .............................. 271California Fuel ........................................... 271Additives ................................................... 272Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 273Filling the Tank ......................................... 274Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 276

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 276Hood Release ........................................... 277Engine Compartment Overview .................. 278Engine Oil ................................................. 279Engine Oil Life System .............................. 282Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 284Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 286Manual Transaxle Fluid ............................. 286Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 286

Engine Coolant .......................................... 287Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 290Engine Overheating ................................... 290Cooling System ......................................... 292Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 297Brakes ...................................................... 298Battery ...................................................... 303Jump Starting ............................................ 304

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 309Bulb Replacement ....................................... 312

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 312Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ............. 313Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

(CHMSL) ................................................ 315Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps

(Coupe) ................................................. 316Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps (Sedan) ......................... 316Back-Up Lamps (Coupe) ........................... 317License Plate Lamp ................................... 318Replacement Bulbs ................................... 318

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

265

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 319Tires ............................................................ 320

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 321Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 324Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 327Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 328When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 330Buying New Tires ...................................... 330Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 332Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 333Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 334Wheel Replacement .................................. 335Tire Chains ............................................... 336If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 337Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 338Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 339Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 344Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 349Compact Spare Tire .................................. 352

Appearance Care ........................................ 353Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 353Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 354Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 355Care of Safety Belts .................................. 356Weatherstrips ............................................ 356Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 356Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 357Finish Care ............................................... 357Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 358Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 358Tires ......................................................... 359Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 359Finish Damage .......................................... 359Underbody Maintenance ............................ 360Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 360Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 360


266

Vehicle Identification .................................. 361Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 361Service Parts Identification Label ............... 362

Electrical System ........................................ 362Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 362Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 363Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 363

Power Windows and Other PowerOptions .................................................. 363

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 363Floor Console Fuse Block ......................... 364Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 365

Capacities and Specifications .................... 369


267

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wants youto be happy with it. We hope you will go to yourdealer for all your service needs. You will getgenuine GM parts and GM-trained and supportedservice people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessories may evencause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle. YourGM dealer can accessorize your vehicle usinggenuine GM Accessories. When you go to yourGM dealer and ask for GM Accessories, you willknow that GM-trained and supported servicetechnicians will perform the work using genuineGM Accessories.

268

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defectsor other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, manyparts and systems (including some inside thevehicle), many fluids, and some component wearby-products contain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order the properservice manual, see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 410.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 78.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 389.

269

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

The 8th digit of your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) shows the code letter or numberthat identifies your engine. You will find the VIN atthe top left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 361.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN Code F),use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octanerating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, you may notice an audible knocking noisewhen you drive, commonly referred to as sparkknock. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you areusing gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and youhear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.

If your vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine(VIN Code B), use premium unleaded gasolinewith a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. Youmay also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s accelerationmay be slightly reduced, and you may notice aslight audible knocking noise, commonly referred toas spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, youmay notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you mightdamage your engine. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavyknocking, your engine needs service.

270

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolinesmay contain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives onpage 272 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. See theunderhood emission control label. If this fuel is notavailable in states adopting California emissionsstandards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily onfuels meeting federal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on and yourvehicle may fail a smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 168. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be covered by yourwarranty.

271

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additives thatwill help prevent engine and fuel system depositsfrom forming, allowing your emission control systemto work properly. In most cases, you should nothave to add anything to your fuel. However, somegasolines contain only the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean, or if your vehicleexperiences problems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your GM dealerhas additives that will help correct and prevent mostdeposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

272

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel containsMMT.General Motors recommends against the useof such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT canreduce the life of spark plugs and the performanceof the emission control system may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealer forservice.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

273

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it;if the cap is released too soon, it will springback to the right.

274

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 356.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.

This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 168.

The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayedon the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuelcap is not properly installed. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 177 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling,do not remove the nozzle. Shut off theflow of fuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 168.

275

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is insidea vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

276

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following.

1. Pull the interior hoodrelease lever withthis symbol on it. Itis located under theinstrument panel onthe driver’s side ofthe vehicle.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pushthe secondary hood release lever to the left.It is located under the front center of the hoodtoward the driver’s side of the vehicle.

3. After you have partially lifted the hood, a gasstrut will automatically take over to lift andhold the hood in the fully open position.Before closing the hood, be sure all the fillercaps are on properly. Lower the hood until thelifting force of the strut is reduced, then releasethe hood to latch fully. Check to make sure thehood is closed and repeat the process ifnecessary.

277

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 engine (2.4L L4 engine similar), here is what you will see:

278

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 284.

B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 279.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 279.

D. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 298 and HydraulicClutch on page 286.

E. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 365.

F. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 304.

G. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 304.

H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 292.

I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 297.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 278for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip downand check the level.

279

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, youwill need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.But you must use the right kind. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 369.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets above theupper mark that shows the proper operatingrange, the engine could be damaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 278 for thelocation of the engineoil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way back in when you arethrough.

280

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You should lookfor and use only an oil that meets GMStandard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

281

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provideeasier cold starting and better protection for theengine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need forgood performance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life SystemWhen to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message in theDriver Information Center (DIC) will come on.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 177.Change your oil as soon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the oil life systemmay not indicate that an oil change is necessary forover a year. However, your engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a year and at thistime the system must be reset. Your dealer hasGM-trained service people who will perform thiswork using genuine GM parts and reset the system.It is also important to check your oil regularly andkeep it at the proper level.

282

If the system is ever reset accidentally, youmust change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the systemso it can calculate when the next oil change isrequired. If a situation occurs where you changeyour oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON messagebeing turned on, reset the system.

After changing the engine oil, the system must bereset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN, with the engine off.

2. Press the information and reset buttonson the DIC at the same time to enter thepersonalization menu. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 179.

3. Press the information button to scroll throughthe available personalization menu modesuntil the DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.

4. Press and hold the reset button until the DICdisplay shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This willtell you the system has been reset.

5. Turn the key to LOCK.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes backon when you start your vehicle, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat the reset procedure.

283

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that maybe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin forvery long. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing of yourused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 278for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

284

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil change aftereach 50,000 mile (85 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 375 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required. Neveruse compressed air to clean the filter.

To inspect or replace the filter, remove the screwsthat hold the cover on and lift off the cover.Be sure to reinstall the cover tightly.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to beburned. The air cleaner not only cleans theair; it helps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and the enginebackfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working onthe engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

285

Automatic Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle tothe dealership service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listedin Additional Required Services on page 378,and be sure to use the transaxle fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 385.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 385.

Manual Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluidloss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealerand have it repaired as soon as possible. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 385for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. This system does not have its ownreservoir. It receives fluid from the brake mastercylinder reservoir.

See Brakes on page 298 for more information.

286

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first,if you add only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you have aproblem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 290.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

287

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 385 for more information.

288

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is located in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 278for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe COLD FILL line.

289

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant surgetank, but only when the engine is cool. If the coolantsurge tank is empty, a special fill procedure isnecessary. See Engine Overheating on page 290for instructions on “How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank.”

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do notspill coolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 278 for moreinformation on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find an engine coolant temperaturewarning light on your vehicle’s instrument panel.See Engine Coolant Temperature WarningLight on page 167 for more information.

290

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn engine coolant temperature warning canindicate a serious problem. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 167.

If you get an engine coolant temperature warning,but see or hear no steam, the problem may notbe too serious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the engine coolant temperature warningwith no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turnit off.

2. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) for automatic transmission orNEUTRAL for manual transmission, whilestopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let theengine idle.

291

3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on,you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FanB. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap

2.2L L4 Engine shown, 2.4L L4 Engine similar

292

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure capor in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,water pump, or somewhere in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.



Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fanis running. If the engine is overheating, thefan should be running. If it is not, your vehicleneeds service.Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner,at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

293

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check tosee if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank.If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not atthe COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it. See Engine Coolant onpage 287 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank,add coolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

294

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolantand the proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if the engineparts are hot enough. Do not spill coolanton a hot engine.

1. You can remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressurecap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout two or two and one-half turns. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop. This will let anypressure still left to be vented out thedischarge hose.

295

2. Then keep turningthe pressure capslowly, andremove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture, to the COLD FILL line. Wait aboutfive minutes, then check to see if the levelis below the COLD FILL line. If the levelis below the line, add additional coolant tobring the level up to the line. Repeat thisprocedure until the level remains constant atthe COLD FILL line for at least five minutes.

296

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lowerthan the COLD FILL line, add more of theproper mixture to the coolant surge tank untilthe level reaches the COLD FILL line.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.See your dealer, if necessary.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer’s instructions before use. Ifyou will be operating your vehicle in an area wherethe temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection against freezing.

297

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 278for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution to freezeand damage your washer fluid tank andother parts of the washer system. Also,water does not clean as well as washerfluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tankif it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damage yourwasher system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake mastercylinder and, on manualtransaxle vehicles, theclutch hydraulic systemuse the same reservoir.The reservoir is filledwith DOT-3 brake fluid.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 278for the location of the reservoir.

298

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The first is thatthe brake fluid goes down to an acceptable levelduring normal brake lining wear. When new liningsare put in, the fluid level goes back up. The otherreason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake and/orclutch hydraulic system. If it is, you should havethe brake and/or clutch system fixed, since a leakmeans that sooner or later the brakes and/or clutchwill not work well, or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake/clutchfluid. Adding fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when the brake linings are worn, youwill have too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake/clutch hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake and/or clutchhydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brakewarning light will come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 165.

299

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 385.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake/clutch system, the brakes/clutchmay not work well, or they may not evenwork at all. This could cause a crash.Always use the proper brake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake/clutch system parts. For example, justa few drops of mineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brake/clutch hydraulicsystem can damage brake/clutch systemparts so badly that they will have to bereplaced. Do not let someone put in thewrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluidon your vehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 356.

300

Brake WearYour vehicle has front disc brakes and may haverear drum brakes or rear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except whenyou are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

If your vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do nothave wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rearbrake rubbing noise, have the rear brake liningsinspected immediately. Also, the rear brake drumsshould be removed and inspected each time thetires are removed for rotation or changing. Whenyou have the front brake pads replaced, have therear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

301

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a moderate brake stop, thedisc brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely makea moderate or heavier stop, then the brakes mightnot adjust correctly. If you drive in that way,then — very carefully — make a few moderatebrake stops about every 1,000 miles (1 600 km),so the brakes will adjust properly.

If your vehicle has rear drum brakes and thebrake pedal goes down farther than normal, therear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjustthem by backing up and firmly applying the brakesa few times.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality GM brake parts. When you replace partsof the braking system — for example, when thebrake linings wear down and you need new onesput in — be sure you get new approved GMreplacement parts. If you do not, the brakes may nolonger work properly. For example, if someone putsin brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, thebalance between the front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

302

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery.

Your vehicle’s battery is located in the trunk. Youdo not need to access the battery to jump startyour vehicle. See Jump Starting on page 304.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 304 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

303

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a

12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system isnot a 12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper

cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do not want.You would not be able to start your vehicle, andthe bad grounding could damage the electricalsystems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

304

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysturn off your radio and other accessories whenjump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet.Turn off the radio and all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparks and help saveboth batteries. And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle andlocate the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on that vehicle.You will not see the battery of your vehicleunder the hood. It is located in the trunk. Youwill not need to access your battery for jumpstarting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+)and a remote negative (−) jump startingterminal.

The remote positiveterminal is locatedunder a red tetheredcap on the enginecompartment fuse block.Lift the cap to accessthe terminal.

305

The remote negative (−)ground terminal, markedGND (−), is locatedbehind the enginecoolant surge tank.

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 278 for more information on the locationof the positive (+) and negative (−) terminalson your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to the batteryinstalled in your new vehicle. But if abattery has filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low, addwater to take care of that first. If you don’t,explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

306

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) willgo to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal location on the vehiclewith the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminalif the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goesto a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminal locationon the vehicle with the dead battery.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)terminal marked GND (−).

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

307

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal (GND)

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

Jumper Cable Removal

308

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to itsoriginal position.

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aimingsystem. The aim has been preset at the factoryand should need no further adjustment

However, If the vehicle is damaged in an accident,the headlamp aim may be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams atyou, this may also mean the vertical aim needs tobe adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to yourdealer for service if the headlamps need to bere-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim theheadlamps as described in the following procedure.

The vehicle should be properly prepared asfollows:

• The vehicle should be placed so theheadlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a lightcolored wall.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on aperfectly level surface which is level allthe way to the wall.

• The vehicle should be placed so it isperpendicular to the wall.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice ormud on it.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled and allother work stopped while headlamp aiming isbeing done.

• The vehicle should be normally loaded with afull tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs(75 kg) on the driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

309

Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’slow-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlampswill be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlampsare aimed properly.

The vertical headlamp aiming screws are locatedunder the hood near the headlamps.

The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mmsocket wrench.

To adjust the vertical aim on the headlamps, dothe following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 277 for more information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of thelow-beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from the ground to theaim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Recordthe distance.

310

4. At the wall measure from the groundupward (A) to the recorded distancefrom Step 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wallthe width of the vehicle at the height of themark in Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improvebeam cut-off when aiming. Covering aheadlamp may cause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to the headlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place apiece of cardboard or equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being adjusted. Do not placedirectly on the headlamp. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlamp beingadjusted to be seen on the flat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,which are under the hood near each headlampassembly.The adjustment screw can be turned with a6 mm socket wrench.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until theheadlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tapeline. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise toraise or lower the angle of the beam.

311

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp ispositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on the left (A) showsthe correct headlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the oppositeheadlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 318.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

312

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps

A. Front Turn Signal/Parking LampB. SidemarkerC. Headlamp

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 277 for more information.

2. Remove the two hex bolts from the headlampassembly.

313

3. Remove the two plastic fasteners from thefascia.

4. Pull the front fascia back.You may need someone else to assist youwith Steps 3 and 4.

5. Pull the headlamp assembly up on an angleand towards the radiator to remove it.

6. Disconnect the bulb base from the wiringharness by lifting the plastic locking tab.

7. To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:7.1. Disconnect the wiring harness from the

bulb socket.7.2. Remove the black retainer by turning it

counterclockwise.

8. Turn the bulb socket for the headlamp, frontturn signal, or parking lamp counterclockwise.For the sidemarker bulb, you will need touse a tool to assist in turning the bulb socket.

9. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.

10. Install a new bulb.

11. Reinstall the bulb assembly by reversingSteps 1 through 8.When reinstalling the headlamp assembly,first make sure that the wiring harness isin its original position. If not, the headlampassembly will not fit correctly.You will also need to line up the two tabson the bottom of the assembly that fit intotwo slots in the headlamp assembly bracket.

314

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)To replace a CHMSL bulb, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 98 formore information.

2. Locate the CHMSL bulb assembly in thetrunk lid.

3. Press the plastic tabs to release the bulbassembly.

4. Pull the bulb assembly down to access thebulbs.

5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.


7. Align the tabs in the bulb assembly with theassembly in the trunk lid. Push the bulbassembly back into place until it snaps in.You may need to use a tool to guide the tabsinto the assembly.

315

Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps(Coupe)To replace a taillamp or rear turn signal bulb,do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 98 formore information.

2. Remove the screw retaining the taillampassembly.

3. Disconnect the wiring harness by lifting up onthe tab to release and pull it straight out.

4. Hold and turn the bulb socket clockwise andthen release it from the lamp housing.

5. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket.


7. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 to reinstall thetaillamp assembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up Lamps (Sedan)To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 98for more information.

2. Remove the fastener which holds down thetrunk trim. Once you have removed the trim,there will be one more fastener to remove.

3. Remove the outer two screws from thetaillamp assembly.

4. Disconnect the wiring harness by lifting up onthe tab to release and pull it straight out.

5. Remove the taillamp from the quarter panel.

316

A. SidemarkerB. Stoplamp/Turn Signal/TaillampC. Back-up

6. Locate the bulb you need to change.

7. Remove the taillamp bulb socket from theassembly by turning it counterclockwise.



10. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall thetaillamp assembly.

Back-Up Lamps (Coupe)To replace a back-up lamp bulb, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws from the face of theback-up lamp.

2. Pull the lamp straight out from the fasciapocket.

3. Hold and turn the bulb socket clockwise andthen release it from the lamp housing.



6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall theback-up lamp assembly.

317

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws holding each of thelicense plate lamps.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp towardyou through the opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the

license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamps Bulb Number

Back-Up Lamps 921

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) 912

Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps 3157KX

Halogen Headlamps,High/Low-Beam 9007 LL

License Plate Lamp andSidemarker 194

Stoplamp, Taillamp and TurnSignal Lamps 3057KX

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

318

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 375 for more information on wiper bladeinspection.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For proper type andlength, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 387. Here is how to removethe wiper blades:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield. 2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper

assembly toward the driver’s side of thevehicle.

3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

319

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included with yourvehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 249.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 327.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

320

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction typeand service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria have aTPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federalsafety guidelines. If your vehicle has 205/55R16size tires, they meet the GM TPC Spec rating, butthe TPC Spec code has not been molded onto thetire’s sidewall.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

321

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): Theletters and numbers following DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides ofthe tire, although only one side may have the dateof manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based onthree performance factors: treadwear, traction andtemperature resistance. For more information seeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 333.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compactspare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If yourvehicle has a compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 352 and If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 337.

Compact Spare Tire Example

322

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides ofthe tire, although only one side may have the dateof manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 327.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria have aTPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federalsafety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standards setby the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. A tire sizewithout the letter P as the first character is certifiedto European standards.

323

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, asshown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as itis wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. Theletter R means radial ply construction; the letter Dmeans diagonal or bias ply construction; and theletter B means belted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is themaximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission/transaxle, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

324

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 327.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), analphanumeric designator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and dateof production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 249.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 249.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 249.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 249.

325

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle. Theside of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressureas shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 327 and Loading Your Vehicle onpage 249.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tirecan operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tireson page 330.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 333.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 249.

326

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under Loading YourVehicle on page 249.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to support yourvehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 249. How you load yourvehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.Never load your vehicle with more weight than itwas designed to carry.

327

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 352.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properlyinflated simply by looking at them. Radial tiresmay look properly inflated even when they areunder-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. Cold means your vehiclehas been sitting for at least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tiresas soon as possible and check wheel alignment.Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See WhenIt Is Time for New Tires on page 330 and WheelReplacement on page 335 for more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The firstrotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 375.

328

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 369.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 338.

329

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when it istime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tires installedon your vehicle, when it was new, were designed tomeet General Motors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC spec) system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM strongly recommends thatyou get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. Thisway, your vehicle will continue to have tires that aredesigned to give the same performance and vehiclesafety, during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over adozen critical specifications that impact the overallperformance of your vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride and handling, tractioncontrol, and tire pressure monitoring performance.GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’ssidewall by the tire manufacturer. If the tires havean all-season tread design, the TPC spec numberis followed by an MS for mud and snow. See TireSidewall Labeling on page 321 for additionalinformation.

330

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damage toyour vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.It is all right to drive with your compactspare temporarily, as it was developed foruse on your vehicle. See Compact SpareTire on page 352.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, make surethey are the same size, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 249,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

331

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires, thismay affect the way your vehicle performs, includingits braking, ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally,if your vehicle has electronic systems such as,anti-lock brakes, traction control, and electronicstability control, the performance of these systemscan be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 330 andAccessories and Modifications on page 268 foradditional information.

332

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary use sparetires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

333

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,or excessive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regular basis. However,if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehiclepulling to one side or the other, the alignment mayneed to be checked. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smooth road, your tiresand wheels may need to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

334

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See your dealer if anyof these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with newGM original equipment parts. This way, you will besure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance,and tire or tire chain clearance to the body andchassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 338 for moreinformation.

335

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P205/55R16 orP205/50R17 size tires, do not use tirechains. They can damage your vehiclebecause there is not enough clearance.



Tire chains used on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension, or othervehicle parts. The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and you or others may beinjured in a crash.

Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommendsit for use on your vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions. Followthat manufacturer’s instructions. To helpavoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,readjust, or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinyour vehicle’s wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the front tires.

336

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other thanP205/55R16 or P205/50R17, use tire chains onlywhere legal and only when you must. Use onlySAE Class S-type chains that are the propersize for your tires. Install them on the front tiresand tighten them as tightly as possible with theends securely fastened. Drive slowly and followthe chain manufacturer’s instructions. If youcan hear the chains contacting your vehicle,stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning the wheels with chains onwill damage your vehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is muchmore likely to leak out slowly. But if you should everhave a blowout, here are a few tips about what toexpect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheelfirmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correction youwould use in a skid. In any rear blowout removeyour foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the way you want thevehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, butyou can still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well offthe road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing a flattire. If it is used for anything else, you orothers could be badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. Use the jackprovided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

337

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour hazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transaxle shift leverin PARK (P), or shift a manualtransaxle to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).



3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When you have a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

338

The following information will tell you how to usethe jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is located inthe trunk.

Base Models1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 98 for

more information.

2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tireand tools.

339

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Spare TireD. Wing Nut

E. Jack and WheelWrench

F. Bolt

3. Remove the retainer (B) that holds down thespare tire. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 352 for more information.

340

4. Remove the spare tire (C) by gently pulling itup and out of the trunk.

5. Remove the wing nut (D) that holds the jackand remove the jack and wheel wrench (E).

Uplevel Models1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 98 for

more information.

2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tireand tools.

341

A. RetainerB. Jack and Wheel

Wrench

C. Spare TireD. Foam SupportE. Bolt

3. Remove the retainer (A) that holds down thejack, wheel wrench (B) and spare tire (C).

4. Remove the spare tire by gently pulling it upand out of the trunk.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A)and wheel wrench (B).

342

You will need to turn the plastic wheel nutcounterclockwise to loosen the wheel wrenchfrom the jack.

Press the button and then pull on the end of thewheel wrench to extend the handle.

343

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. If your vehicle has plastic wheel covers, usethe wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheelnut caps.Once you have loosened the plastic wheel nutcaps with the wheel wrench, you can finishloosening them with your fingers. The plasticnut caps do not come off.

2. Using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pryalong the edge of the wheel cover until itcomes off.

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheelnuts. Do not remove them yet.

4. It is recommended that you do a safety checkbefore preceding. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 338 for more information.

Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is inthe correct position or you may damage yourvehicle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty.

5. Position the jack lift head at the jacklocation nearest the flat tire. The frontlocation is about 8 inches (20 cm)behind the front wheel opening.

344

The rear location is about 4 inches (10 cm) infront of the rear wheel opening.

6. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in thevehicle’s frame, where the notch is located,nearest the flat tire.

7. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough room forthe compact spare tire to fit under the vehicle.

345

9. Remove all of thewheel nuts.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheelnuts become loose after time. The wheelcould come off and cause an accident.When you change a wheel, remove any rustor dirt from the places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,you can use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but be sure to use a scraper or wirebrush later, if needed, to get all the rust ordirt off.

346

10. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces, andspare wheel.

11. Place the compact spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

12. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded endof the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nutby hand until the wheel is held against the hub.

13. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

347

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 369for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tightenthe wheel nuts in the proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification. See Capacitiesand Specifications on page 369 for the wheelnut torque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscrosssequence, as shown.

4-Wheel Nuts 5-Wheel Nuts

348

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel coverin the trunk until you have the flat tire repairedor replaced.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

349

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Jack and Wheel

Wrench

D. Stow BoltExtension Rod

E. Spare TireF. Bolt

Base Model

350

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Jack and Wheel

WrenchD. Stow Bolt

Extension Rod

E. Spare TireF. Foam SupportG. Bolt

To store a flat or spare tire and tools, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the stow bolt extension rod andsleeve from the jack.

2. Screw the stow bolt extension rod andthe sleeve into the existing spare tirehold-down bolt.

3. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, firstremove the center cap with your hand orthe wheel wrench.

4. Place the flat tire face down into the spare tiretub. Avoid scraping the aluminum wheel, if thevehicle has one, on the hold-down bolt.

5. Re-attach the wheel wrench to the jack.

6. Place the jack into the center of the flat tire,being careful not to scratch the inside ofthe wheel.

Uplevel Model

351

7. Place the smaller jack hold-down nut (basemodels only) in a safe place for use whenyou put the compact spare tire back intothe trunk.

8. Remove the plastic sleeve from the stow boltextension rod. Secure the jack and roadwheel using the larger plastic retainer.

The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare with a full-size tireas soon as possible.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is madeto perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so youcan finish your trip and have the full-size tirerepaired or replaced at your convenience.

Of course, it is best to replace the spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tirewill last longer and be in good shape in case it isneeded again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compact sparecan get caught on the rails. That can damagethe tire and wheel, and maybe other parts ofyour vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel withother wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not usetire chains on your compact spare.

352

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best ifit is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dustand dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirtcan damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plasticsurfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommendedto remove particles from your upholstery. It isimportant to keep your upholstery from becomingand remaining heavily soiled. Soils should beremoved as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’sinterior may experience extremes of heat thatcould cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, onlyuse cleaners specifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned. Permanent damagemay result from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were not intended.

Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove anyaccidental over-spray from other surfacesimmediately. To prevent over-spray, applycleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilationby opening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

353

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachmentfrequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canistervacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only beused on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. Forsoils, always try to remove them first with plainwater or club soda. Before cleaning, gently removeas much of the soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

354

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth each time it becomessoiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution can be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers onplastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protect softplastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and are notrecommended. Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containing organic solvents toclean your vehicle’s interior because they can alterthe appearance by increasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in the windshield andeven make it difficult to see through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

355

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 385.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strongsoaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse thevehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.Approved cleaning products can be obtained fromyour dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 360. Do not use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based, or that contain acid orabrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushedpromptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, orthey could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

356

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft clothand a car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 356.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 360.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxesand polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishesthat are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar,tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle ina garage or covered whenever possible.

357

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not formwhen it is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Clean theblade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked infull-strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinsethe blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Use onlyGM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

358

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damage thealuminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Neverdrive a vehicle equipped with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying atire dressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be correctedin your dealer’s body and paint shop.

359

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these arenot removed, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they havecorrosion protection.At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil andasphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches and other lightsurface contamination.

360

Description Usage

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire Shine LowGloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

361

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label in the trunk, on the driverside, near the spare tire cover. It is very helpful ifyou ever need to order parts. On this label,you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment can damage yourvehicle and the damage would not be coveredby your warranty. Some add-on electricalequipment can keep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’sbattery, even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 78.

362

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses.Should your headlamps fail to function, haveyour headlamp system checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuitbreaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motorcools. If the overload is caused by some electricalproblem, have it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsFuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opensprotecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance of damagecaused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Ifthe band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Besure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do nothave a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that hasthe same amperage. Just pick some feature of yourvehicle that you can get along without — like theradio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse if it isthe correct amperage. Replace it as soon asyou can.

There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the floorconsole fuse block and the engine compartmentfuse block.

There is one additional fuse located in the back ofthe vehicle near the battery.

363

Floor Console Fuse Block

The floor console fuse block is located on thepassenger’s side of the floor console behind theforward panel. The panel has three clips. Pullthe panel to disconnect the three clips, and accessthe fuses. Use the fuse puller to remove fuses.

Fuses Usage

1 Fuse Puller

2 Empty

3 Empty

4 Empty

5 Empty

6 Amplifier

7 Cluster

364

Fuses Usage

8 Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+9 Stoplamp

10 Heating, Ventilation, AirConditioning, PASS-Key® III+

11 Empty

12 Spare

13 Airbag

14 Spare

15 Windshield Wiper

16 Climate Control System, Ignition

17 Empty

18 Empty

19 Electric Power Steering,Steering Wheel Control

20 Sunroof

21 Spare

22 Empty

23 Audio System

24 Sensing and DiagnosticModule (Airbag)

Fuses Usage

25 Engine Control Module,Transaxle Control Module

26 Door Locks

27 Interior Lights

28 Steering Wheel Control Illumination

29 Power Windows

Relays Usage

30 Climate Control System

31 Empty

32 Retained Accessory Power (RAP)

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse block is located onthe driver’s side of the vehicle. Lift off the coverto check the fuses. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 278 for more informationon location.

365

Fuses Usage

SPARES Spares

Blank Not Used

Fuses Usage

Blank Not Used

REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger

366

Fuses Usage

COOL FAN2 Engine Cooling Fan High Speed

CRNK Starter

COOL FAN 1 Engine Cooling Fan Low Speed

BCM3 Body Control Module 3

BCM2 Body Control Module 2

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

HORN Horn

RT HI BEAM Passenger’s Side High Beam

LT HI BEAM Driver’s Side High Beam

RT LO BEAM Passenger’s Side Low Beam

LT LO BEAM Driver’s Side Low Beam

DRL Daytime Running Lamps

FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

EXH Exhaust Emissions

Blank Not Used

INJ Injectors

Blank Not Used

Fuses Usage

ABS Anti-lock Brake System

PCM/ECM Powertrain Control Module/EngineControl Module

EPS Electric Power Steering

AIR PUMP AIR Pump

PRK LAMP Park Lamps

WPR Windshield Wiper

IP IGN Ignition

A/C CLTCH Air Conditioning Clutch

AIR SOL/AFTERCOOL

AIR Solenoid (L61, LE5),Aftercooler (L4)

ABS2 Anti-lock Brake System 2

PRK/NEUT Park, Neutral

ECM/TRANS Engine Control Module, Transaxle

BCK UP Back-Up Lamps

TRUNK/OUTLET Trunk, Accessory Power Outlet

Blank Not Used

Blank Not Used

367

Fuses Usage

S BAND/ONSTAR Audio, OnStar®

ABS3 Anti-lock Brake System 3

LTR Cigarette Lighter

MIR Mirrors

HTD SEATS Heated Seats

CNSTR VENT Canister Vent

Relays Usage

REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger

COOL FAN2 Engine Cooling Fan 2

WPR HI/LO Windshield Wiper High/Low Speed

CRNK Starter

Relays Usage

COOL FAN1 Engine Cooling Fan 1

FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

WPR ON/OFF Windshield Wiper On/Off

COOL FANS Engine Cooling Fans

PWR/TRN Powertrain

AIR PUMP AIR Pump

A/C CLTCH Air Conditioning Clutch

AIR SOL/AFTERCOOL

AIR Solenoid (L61, LE5),Aftercooler (L4)

RUN/CRNK Run, Crank

Misc. Usage

PLR Fuse Puller

368

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer toRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 385 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System

2.2L and 2.4L Engines 7.4 qt 7.0 L

Engine Oil with Filter

2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engines 5.0 qt 4.7 L

Fuel Tank

2.2L L4 Engine (with NU6 emissions) sold new in CA, ME,VT, NY, NH, MA (see your dealer for bordering states 13.5 gal 51.1 L

2.2L L4 Engine (without NU6 emissions) sold new in allother states (see your dealer for more information) 13.0 gal 49.2 L

2.4L L4 Engine sold new in all states 13.0 gal 49.2 L

369

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Transaxle, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill) 7.0 qt 6.6 L

Transaxle, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill) 1.7 qt 1.6 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

2.2L L4 F AutomaticManual 0.040 inch (1.01 mm)

2.4L L4 B AutomaticManual 0.040 inch (1.01 mm)

370

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 372Introduction ............................................... 372Maintenance Requirements ........................ 372Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 373Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 373Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 375Additional Required Services ..................... 378Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 379Owner Checks and Services ..................... 380

At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 381At Least Once a Month ............................. 381At Least Once a Year ............................... 382Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 385Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ................................. 387Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 388Maintenance Record .................................. 389

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

371

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be coveredby warranty.

372

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may needmore frequent checks and replacements. So pleaseread the following and note how you drive. If youhave any questions on how to keep your vehicle ingood condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.

373

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 249.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 270.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 375 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 378 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 379 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehiclecan be dangerous. In trying to do somejobs, you can be seriously injured. Do yourown maintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper toolsand equipment for the job. If you have anydoubt, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer tohave a qualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should haveyour GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

374

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information,see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 410.

Owner Checks and Services on page 380 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 385 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 387.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL SOON message comeson, it means that service is required for yourvehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It ispossible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system may notindicate that vehicle service is necessary for over ayear. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench®

dealer has GM-trained service technicians who willperform this work using genuine GM parts and resetthe system.

375

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 282 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in thefollowing for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your firstservice be Maintenance I, your second servicebe Maintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II may berequired more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE OIL SOON message comes on within10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever theCHANGE OIL SOON message comes on10 months or more since the last service or if themessage has not come on at all for one year.

376

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 279. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 282. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 284. See footnote (k). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 328 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 381.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (l). •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g). •

377

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 284. • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (severe service only).See footnote (h).

• • •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (m).

•

378

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect drum brakelinings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect otherbrake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steeringcables for proper hook-up, binding, cracks,chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hingesand latches, hood hinges and latches and trunk lidhinges and latches. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Check system for interference or bindingand for damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components thathave high effort or excessive wear. Do notlubricate accelerator or cruise control cables.

379

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter ifthe vehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid and filter do not requirechanging.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 287 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid ifneeded.

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. YourGM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you withthese checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 385.

380

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the properoil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 279 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.Failure to keep your engine oil at the properlevel can cause damage to your enginenot covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 287 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to the correct pressures.Do not forget to check the spare tire. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 327. Check tomake sure the spare tire is stored securely.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 338.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 328.

381

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 118.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediatelyif it starts.

3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to startthe engine in each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If thevehicle starts in any other position, contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.On manual transaxle vehicles, put theshift lever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to start the engine.The vehicle should start only when the clutchpedal is pushed down all the way to thefloor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedalis not pushed all the way down, contact yourGM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

382

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 118.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• With an automatic transaxle, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK only when the shift leveris in PARK (P). The ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK.

• With a manual transaxle, the ignition keyshould come out only in LOCK.

Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.It should only lock when turned to the right.Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

383

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flushany corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughly any areas wheremud and other debris can collect.

384

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meetsGM Standard GM6094M anddisplays the American PetroleumInstitute Certified for GasolineEngines starburst symbol.GM Goodwrench® oil meets all therequirements for your vehicle.To determine the proper viscosity foryour vehicle’s engine, see EngineOil on page 279.


Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolanton page 287.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

HydraulicClutch System

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

ManualTransaxle

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,in Canada 88861801).

385


AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ManualTransaxle Shift

Linkage

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.


Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood andDoor Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) or DielectricSilicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

386

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourGM dealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® PartNumber

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 21999324 A2956C

Engine Oil Filter 12605566 PF457G

Spark Plugs 12598004 41-103

Passenger’s Compartment Air Filter 52493319 CF125

Windshield Wiper Blade (Hook Type)

Driver’s Side — 22 inches (56 cm) 15243233 —

Passenger’s Side — 17 inches (43 cm) 15243232 —

387

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engines

388

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 372.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 380 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

389

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



390




391




392

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 394Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 394Online Owner Center ................................. 396Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 397Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 397GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 398Roadside Assistance Program ................... 399Courtesy Transportation ............................. 401Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders ............................ 403Collision Damage Repair ........................... 404

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 409Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 409Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 409Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 409Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 410

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

393

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service or parts manager, contact the owner of thedealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership without furtherhelp, contact the Pontiac Customer AssistanceCenter by calling 1-800-762-2737. In Canada,contact GM of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to give theCustomer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration or title, orthe plate at the top left of the instrument paneland visible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Pontiac, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

394

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your new vehicle.However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied afterfollowing the procedure outlined in Steps One andTwo, you should file with the BBB Auto LineProgram to enforce any additional rights you mayhave. Canadian owners refer to your Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information booklet forinformation on the Canadian Motor VehicleArbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action, useof the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any other venue for reliefavailable to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

395

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

396

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Pontiac has TTY equipment availableat its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY usercan communicate with Pontiac by dialing:1-800-833-PONT (7668). (TTY users in Canadacan dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesPontiac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Pontiac, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistancePontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.Pontiac.com1-800-762-2737 or1-800-833-7668(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE(762-3743)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

397

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma #2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

398

Roadside Assistance ProgramAs the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Pontiac RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road. ContactPontiac’s Roadside Assistance toll-free at1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743). RoadsideAssistance Representatives are available 24 hoursa day, 365 days a year.

We will provide the following services during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expenseto you:

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel($5 maximum) for the customer to get to thenearest service station.

• Lock-out Service (identification required):Replacement keys or locksmith service willbe covered at no charge if you are unable togain entry into your vehicle. Delivery ofthe replacement key will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearestdealership for warranty service or in the eventof a vehicle-disabling accident. Assistanceprovided when the vehicle is mired insand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tirewill be covered at no charge. The customeris responsible for the repair or replacement ofthe tire if not covered by a warrantablefailure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

• Dealer Locator Service

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder Pontiac’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.However, when other services are utilized, ourRoadside Assistance Representatives will explainany payment obligations you might incur.

399

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate numberof the vehicle.

• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. Pontiac RoadsideAssistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743), texttelephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.

Pontiac reserves the right to limit services orreimbursement to an owner or driver when,in Pontiac’s judgement, the claims becomeexcessive in frequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Pontiac reserves the right to makeany changes or discontinue the RoadsideAssistance program at any time withoutnotification.

Canadian Roadside AssistanceVehicles purchased in Canada have an extensiveroadside assistance program accessible fromanywhere in Canada or the United States.Please refer to the Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information book.

400

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program isoffered to customers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. Severaltransportation options are available when warrantyrepairs are required. This will reduce yourinconvenience during warranty repairs.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,you should contact your dealer and request anappointment. By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,

of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable towait, GM helps to minimize your inconvenienceby providing several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get you to your destination withminimal interruption of your daily schedule.This includes one-way or round trip shuttle serviceto a destination up to 10 miles (16 km) from thedealership.

401

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warrantyrepairs, reimbursement of public transportationexpenses may be available, for up to a maximumof five days. In addition, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative,reimbursement for reasonable fuel expensesmay be available, up to a five-day maximum.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for a warranty repair. Reimbursementwill be limited to a maximum amount per day andmust be supported by receipts. This requiresthat you sign and complete a rental agreement andmeet state, local and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc.

You are responsible for fuel usage charges andmay also be responsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,but it is not part of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate booklet entitled Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information furnished witheach new vehicle provides detailed warrantycoverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only atparticipating dealers and all program options,such as shuttle service, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact your dealer forspecific information about availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will be administeredby appropriate dealer personnel.

402

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle Coverage period of theGeneral Motors of Canada New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, alternative transportation may beavailable under the Courtesy TransportationProgram. Please consult your dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computer systemsthat monitor and control several aspects of thevehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-boardvehicle computers to monitor emission controlcomponents to optimize fuel economy, to monitorconditions for airbag deployment and, if soequipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to helpthe driver control the vehicle in difficult drivingsituations.

Some information may be stored during regularoperations to facilitate repair ofdetected malfunctions; other information isstored only in a crash event by computer systems,such as those commonly called Event DataRecorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle isequipped with StabiliTrak®, steering performance,including yaw rate, steering wheel angle, andlateral acceleration, is also recorded. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehiclecrash performance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles anddriving safety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do notrecord sounds, such as conversation of vehicleoccupants.

403

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement ormanual for information on its operations anddata collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

404

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for your vehicle. As aresult, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

405

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 399 for moreinformation.

406

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you willneed from the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facilityfor your vehicle. Whether you select aGM dealer or a private collision repair facilityto fix the damage, make sure you arecomfortable with them. Remember, you willhave to feel comfortable with their workfor a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what workwill be performed on your vehicle. If you havea question, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

407

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts.

Remember if your vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurancecoverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

408

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-762-2737,or write:

Pontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

409

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to ProductService Bulletins can be obtained by contactingyour General Motors dealer or by calling1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483).

410

Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner’smanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

411

✍ NOTES

412

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 268Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 150Additives, Fuel ............................................ 272Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 362Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 284Air Conditioning ........................................... 152Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 162Readiness Light ....................................... 161

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 403

Airbag System ............................................... 64Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 79How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 71Passenger Sensing System ....................... 73Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 78What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 71What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 72

Airbag System (cont.)When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 69Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 67

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 223Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 166Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 358Care of Safety Belts ................................ 356Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 360Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 357Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 353Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 354Finish Care .............................................. 357Finish Damage ......................................... 359Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 355Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 359Tires ........................................................ 359Underbody Maintenance ........................... 360Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 360Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 356Weatherstrips ........................................... 356Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 358

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 151

413

Audio System(s) .......................................... 185Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 214Care of Your CD Player ........................... 216Care of Your CDs .................................... 216Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 216Radio with CD ................................ 189, 194Setting the Time .............................. 186, 187Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 214Understanding Radio Reception ............... 215XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 216

Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 96Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 286Operation ................................................. 113

BBattery ........................................................ 303

Electric Power Management ..................... 149Run-Down Protection ............................... 150

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 240

BrakeAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 223Emergencies ............................................ 225Parking .................................................... 118System Warning Light .............................. 165

Brakes ........................................................ 298Braking ....................................................... 222Braking in Emergencies ............................... 225Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 106Bulb Replacement ....................................... 312

Back-Up Lamps ....................................... 317Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) ............................... 315Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 312Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 309Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 313License Plate Lamps ................................ 318Replacement Bulbs .................................. 318Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps ............. 316Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ..................................... 316Buying New Tires ........................................ 330

414

CCalifornia Fuel ............................................. 271California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 269Capacities and Specifications ...................... 369Carbon Monoxide ....... 98, 123, 243, 256, 257Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 356Your CD Player ........................................ 216Your CDs ................................................. 216

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 205Center Console Storage Area ...................... 131Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .... 315Chains, Tire ................................................. 336Charging System Light ................................ 164Check

Engine Light ............................................ 168Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 276Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 360Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 45Infants and Young Children ........................ 42Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 51Older Children ........................................... 39Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 57

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 60Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 49

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 151Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 358Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 357Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 354Finish Care .............................................. 357Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 353Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 355Tires ........................................................ 359Underbody Maintenance ........................... 360Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 356Weatherstrips ........................................... 356Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 358

Climate Control System ............................... 152Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 155Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 155

Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 286Collision Damage Repair ............................. 404Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 35Compact Spare Tire .................................... 352Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 102

415

Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 222Convenience Net ......................................... 131Coolant

Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 167Heater, Engine ......................................... 112Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 290

Cooling System ........................................... 292Cruise Control ............................................. 143Cupholder(s) ................................................ 131Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 401Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY) Users ................. 397Customer Assistance Offices .................... 397Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 394GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 398Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 409Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 409Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 409Roadside Assistance Program .................. 399Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 410

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 147Disc, MP3 ................................................... 205Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 269Dome Lamp ................................................ 149Door

Automatic Door Lock ................................. 96Delayed Locking ........................................ 95Locks ......................................................... 94Power Door Locks ..................................... 95Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 96Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 96

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 22Seat Height Adjuster .................................... 9

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 174DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 174DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 179DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 177

Driver’s Storage Compartment ..................... 131Driving

At Night ................................................... 234City .......................................................... 238Defensive ................................................. 218Drunken ................................................... 219Freeway ................................................... 239

416

Driving (cont.)Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 241In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 235Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 248Winter ...................................................... 243

EEasy Entry Seat ............................................ 14Electric Power Management ........................ 149Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 362Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 365Floor Console Fuse Block ........................ 364Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 363Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 363Power Windows and Other

Power Options ...................................... 363Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 363

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 284Battery ..................................................... 303Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 168Coolant .................................................... 287Coolant Heater ......................................... 112Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 167Drive Belt Routing .................................... 388Engine Compartment Overview ................ 278Exhaust ................................................... 123Oil ........................................................... 279Oil Life System ........................................ 282Overheating ............................................. 290Starting .................................................... 110

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ................ 226Warning Light ........................................... 166

Entry/Exit Lighting ....................................... 149Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 403Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 38

417

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 284Finish Damage ............................................ 359Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 216Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 138Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 141Flat Tire ...................................................... 337Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 338Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 349Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ................................. 286Manual Transaxle ..................................... 286Windshield Washer .................................. 297

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 172Fog Lamps .................................................. 148Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 15Fuel ............................................................ 270

Additives .................................................. 272California Fuel .......................................... 271Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 276Filling Your Tank ...................................... 274

Fuel (cont.)Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 273Gage ....................................................... 173Gasoline Octane ...................................... 270Gasoline Specifications ............................ 271

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 365Floor Console Fuse Block ........................ 364Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 363Windshield Wiper ..................................... 363

GGage

Fuel ......................................................... 173Speedometer ........................................... 159Tachometer .............................................. 159

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 270Specifications ........................................... 271

Glove Box ................................................... 131GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 398

418

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 138Head Restraints ............................................ 13Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 309Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 363Headlamps .................................................. 146

Bulb Replacement .................................... 312Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 147Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 141Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 312Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 313High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 140On Reminder ........................................... 147Wiper Activated ........................................ 147

Heated Seats ................................................ 10Heater ......................................................... 152Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................ 9Highbeam On Light ..................................... 173Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 241Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 241Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 276Release ................................................... 277

Horn ............................................................ 138How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 22Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 286

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 107Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 42Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 327Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 136Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 148Cluster ..................................................... 158

JJump Starting .............................................. 304

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 86Keys ............................................................. 85

419

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 321Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 150Dome ....................................................... 149Electric Power Management ..................... 149Fog .......................................................... 148Mirror Reading ......................................... 149

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 51

License Plate Lamps ................................... 318Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 161Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 166Brake System Warning ............................. 165Charging System ..................................... 164Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 167Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light ....................................... 166Fog Lamp ................................................ 172Highbeam On .......................................... 173

Light (cont.)Malfunction Indicator ................................ 168Oil Pressure ............................................. 171Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 162Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 160Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 160Security ................................................... 172Up-Shift ................................................... 164

LightingEntry/Exit ................................................. 149

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 249Locks

Automatic Door Lock ................................. 96Delayed Locking ........................................ 95Door .......................................................... 94Lockout Protection ..................................... 97Power Door ............................................... 95Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 96Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 96

Loss of Control ........................................... 232Lumbar

Manual Controls .......................................... 9

420

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 378At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 381At Least Once a Month ............................ 381At Least Once a Year .............................. 382Introduction .............................................. 372Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 379Maintenance Record ................................ 389Maintenance Requirements ...................... 372Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 387Owner Checks and Services .................... 380Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 385Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 375Using ....................................................... 373Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 373

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 168Manual Lumbar Controls ................................. 9Manual Seats .................................................. 8

Manual TransaxleFluid ........................................................ 286Operation ................................................. 116

Manual Windows ......................................... 100Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 177Mirror Reading Lamps ................................. 149Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 125Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 125Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 126Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 126Outside Remote Control Mirror ................. 125

MP3 ............................................................ 205MyGMLink.com ............................................ 396

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 106Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 387

421

OOdometer .................................................... 159Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 230Oil

Engine ..................................................... 279Pressure Light .......................................... 171

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 282Older Children, Restraints ............................. 39Online Owner Center ................................... 396OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 127Other Warning Devices ................................ 138Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 155Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 150Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 126Power Mirrors .......................................... 126Remote Control Mirror .............................. 125

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 380

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 359Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 119Shifting Out of ......................................... 121

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 118Over Things That Burn ............................ 122

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 162Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 155Passenger Sensing System ........................... 73Passing ....................................................... 230PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 104PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 104Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 150Door Locks ................................................ 95Electrical System ..................................... 363Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 110Windows .................................................. 101

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 38Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ........... 96

422

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 21

RRadios ........................................................ 185

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 216Care of Your CDs .................................... 216Radio with CD ................................ 189, 194Setting the Time .............................. 186, 187Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 214Understanding Reception ......................... 215

Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 96Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 35Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 32Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 125Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 125Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 10Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 385Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 254Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 86

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,Operation ................................................... 87

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing theSpare Tire ................................................ 344

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 339Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 318Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 409General Motors ........................................ 409United States Government ....................... 409

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 80Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 81Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 110Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 31Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 399Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 248Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 388Running the Engine While Parked ............... 124

423

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 160Pretensioners ............................................. 38Reminder Light ........................................ 160

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 356Driver Position ........................................... 22How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 22Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 21Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 35Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 32Right Front Passenger Position .................. 31Safety Belt Extender .................................. 38Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 31Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 16Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 30

Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 375

SeatsDriver Seat Height Adjuster .......................... 9Easy Entry Seat ........................................ 14Head Restraints ......................................... 13Heated Seats ............................................. 10Manual ........................................................ 8Manual Lumbar ............................................ 9Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 10Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 15

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 57Right Front Seat Position ........................... 60

Security Light .............................................. 172Service ........................................................ 268

Accessories and Modifications .................. 268Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 270California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 269Doing Your Own Work ............................. 269Engine Soon Light ................................... 168Publications Ordering Information ............. 410

424

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 78Setting the Time ................................. 186, 187Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 359Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 119Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 121Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 30Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 140Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 352Installing .................................................. 344Removing ................................................ 339Storing ..................................................... 349

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 369Speedometer ............................................... 159Starting Your Engine ................................... 110Steering ...................................................... 227Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 214Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 139Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 131Convenience Net ..................................... 131Cupholder(s) ............................................ 131Driver’s Storage Compartment ................. 131Glove Box ................................................ 131

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 248Sun Visors .................................................. 102Snroof ......................................................... 132

TTachometer ................................................. 159Taillamps

Turn Signal Lamps ................................... 316Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ..................................... 316Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 214Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 102

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 102PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 104PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 104

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 139Tires ........................................................... 320

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 358

Buying New Tires ..................................... 330Chains ..................................................... 336Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 338Cleaning .................................................. 359Compact Spare Tire ................................. 352Different Size ........................................... 332If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 337Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 327Inspection and Rotation ............................ 328Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 344

425

Tires (cont.)Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 344Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 339Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 349Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 321Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 324Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 333Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 334Wheel Replacement ................................. 335When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 330

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 254Towing a Trailer .............................. 256, 257Your Vehicle ............................................. 254

TractionEnhanced Traction System (ETS) ............. 226Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light ....................................... 166

TransaxleFluid, Automatic ....................................... 286Fluid, Manual ........................................... 286

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 113Transaxle Operation, Manual ....................... 116Transmission

Up-Shift Light ........................................... 164Trunk ............................................................ 98Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 140Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 139

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 215Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 333Up-Shift Light .............................................. 164

426

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 222Loading .................................................... 249

Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders .............................. 403

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 361Service Parts Identification Label .............. 362

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 179

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 155Visors .......................................................... 102

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 157Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 177Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 138Other Warning Devices ............................ 138

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 334Different Size ........................................... 332Replacement ............................................ 335

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 49Windows ..................................................... 100

Manual ..................................................... 100Power ...................................................... 101

427

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 142Washer Fluid ........................................... 297Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 319Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 358Wiper Fuses ............................................ 363Wipers ..................................................... 141

Winter Driving ............................................. 243Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................... 147

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 212XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 216

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 373

428

2007 pontiac g5 owner manual m - vaden gmpp · 2006. 7. 6. · vehicle damage warnings also, in...

Documents